Samsung Electronics Co SGHI527 Portable Handset with Multi-band WCDMA/GSM/EDGE/LTE, WLAN, Bluetooth and RFID User Manual i527 Mega

Download:
Mirror Download [FCC.gov]
Document ID	1995714
Application ID	fAfX9Qw3dv4bQFi275jJuQ==
Document Description	Users Manual
Short Term Confidential	No
Permanent Confidential	No
Supercede	No
Document Type	User Manual
Display Format	Adobe Acrobat PDF - pdf
Filesize	495.02kB (6187699 bits)
Date Submitted	2013-06-19 00:00:00
Date Available	2013-09-04 00:00:00
Creation Date	2017-10-26 23:38:51
Producing Software	GPL Ghostscript 9.18
Document Lastmod	2017-10-26 23:38:51
Document Title	i527 Mega.book
Document Creator	FrameMaker 9.0
Document Author:	wcarlisl

4 G
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
nl
Mega Logo Treatment Goes Here
L T E
S M A R T P H O N E
User Manual
Fo
Please read this manual before operating your
phone, and keep it for future reference.
Intellectual Property
Open Source Software
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
nl
All Intellectual Property, as defined below, owned by or which is otherwise the property of Samsung or its respective suppliers
relating to the SAMSUNG Phone, including but not limited to, accessories, parts, or software relating there to (the “Phone
System”), is proprietary to Samsung and protected under federal laws, state laws, and international treaty provisions. Intellectual
Property includes, but is not limited to, inventions (patentable or unpatentable), patents, trade secrets, copyrights, software,
computer programs, and related documentation and other works of authorship. You may not infringe or otherwise violate the
rights secured by the Intellectual Property. Moreover, you agree that you will not (and will not attempt to) modify, prepare
derivative works of, reverse engineer, decompile, disassemble, or otherwise attempt to create source code from the software. No
title to or ownership in the Intellectual Property is transferred to you. All applicable rights of the Intellectual Property shall remain
with SAMSUNG and its suppliers.
Some software components of this product incorporate source code covered under GNU General Public License (GPL), GNU Lesser
General Public License (LGPL), OpenSSL License, BSD License and other open source licenses. To obtain the source code covered
under the open source licenses, please visit:
http://opensource.samsung.com.
Disclaimer of Warranties; Exclusion of Liability
Fo
EXCEPT AS SET FORTH IN THE EXPRESS WARRANTY CONTAINED ON THE WARRANTY PAGE ENCLOSED WITH THE PRODUCT, THE
PURCHASER TAKES THE PRODUCT "AS IS", AND SAMSUNG MAKES NO EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY OF ANY KIND
WHATSOEVER WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE MERCHANTABILITY OF THE PRODUCT OR
ITS FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR USE; THE DESIGN, CONDITION OR QUALITY OF THE PRODUCT; THE
PERFORMANCE OF THE PRODUCT; THE WORKMANSHIP OF THE PRODUCT OR THE COMPONENTS CONTAINED THEREIN; OR
COMPLIANCE OF THE PRODUCT WITH THE REQUIREMENTS OF ANY LAW, RULE, SPECIFICATION OR CONTRACT PERTAINING
SGH-I527_UM_English_UCUAME5_WC_052313_D1
y
THERETO. NOTHING CONTAINED IN THE INSTRUCTION MANUAL SHALL BE CONSTRUED TO CREATE AN EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT. IN ADDITION, SAMSUNG SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR
ANY DAMAGES OF ANY KIND RESULTING FROM THE PURCHASE OR USE OF THE PRODUCT OR ARISING FROM THE BREACH OF
THE EXPRESS WARRANTY, INCLUDING INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR LOSS OF ANTICIPATED PROFITS
OR BENEFITS.
nl
Modification of Software
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
SAMSUNG IS NOT LIABLE FOR PERFORMANCE ISSUES OR INCOMPATIBILITIES CAUSED BY YOUR EDITING OF REGISTRY SETTINGS,
OR YOUR MODIFICATION OF OPERATING SYSTEM SOFTWARE.
USING CUSTOM OPERATING SYSTEM SOFTWARE MAY CAUSE YOUR DEVICE AND APPLICATIONS TO WORK IMPROPERLY. YOUR
CARRIER MAY NOT PERMIT USERS TO DOWNLOAD CERTAIN SOFTWARE, SUCH AS CUSTOM OS.
IF YOUR CARRIER PROHIBITS THIS, IF YOU ATTEMPT TO DOWNLOAD SOFTWARE ONTO THE DEVICE WITHOUT AUTHORIZATION,
YOU WILL BE NOTIFIED ON THE SCREEN THAT UNAUTHORIZED SOFTWARE HAS BEEN DETECTED. YOU SHOULD THEN POWER
DOWN THE DEVICE AND CONTACT YOUR CARRIER TO RESTORE THE DEVICE TO THE CARRIER AUTHORIZED SETTINGS.
SAFE™ (Samsung Approved For Enterprise)
SAFE™: "SAFE™" (Samsung for Enterprise) is a mark for a Samsung device which has been tested against Samsung's own
internal criteria for interoperability with certain third party security-related solutions for MDM and VPN. The testing includes field
testing with local network connection and menu tree testing which tests functionality of the solutions in conjunction with the
Samsung device. During the testing, the device is tested with the security solutions to see if the solutions work with the device as
described by the third party security solution providers. The testing, for example, includes field testing with local network
connection and menu tree testing which tests functionality of the solutions in conjunction with the Samsung device. For more
information about Samsung's SAFE™ program, please refer to www.samsung.com/us/safe.
Fo
Disclaimer of Warranties: EXCEPT AS OTHERWISE PROVIDED IN THEIR STANDARD END USER LICENSE AND WARRANTY, TO THE
FULL EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO., LTD., SAMSUNG TELECOMMUNICATIONS AMERICA, LLC, AND
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
nl
THEIR AFFILIATES (COLLECTIVELY REFERRED TO HEREIN AS THE "SAMSUNG ENTITIES") EXPRESSLY DISCLAIM ANY AND ALL
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,
INTEROPERABILITY OR NON-INFRINGEMENT, WITH RESPECT TO INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY SECURITY PROTECTION, SAFE™
DEVICES AND APPLICATIONS TESTED WITH SAFE™ DEVICES. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE SAMSUNG ENTITIES BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, PUNITIVE, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER WITH RESPECT TO
INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY SECURITY PROTECTION, SAFE™ DEVICES OR APPLICATIONS TESTED WITH SAFE™ DEVICES. In
addition, information technology security protection will be affected by features or functionality associated with, among other
things the e-mail platform, master data management, and virtual private network solutions selected by the software provider,
solution provider or user. Choice of an e-mail, master data management, and virtual private network solution is at the sole
discretion of the software provider, solution provider or user and any associated effect on information technology security
protection is solely the responsibility of the software provider, solution provider or user. For complete statement of limited
warranty, please refer to www.samsung.com/us/safe, available on the web and where Samsung smartphone and Galaxy Tab™
devices are sold. [101212]
Headquarters:
1301 E. Lookout Drive
Richardson, TX 75082
Fo
Samsung Telecommunications America (STA), LLC
Customer Care Center:
1000 Klein Rd.
Plano, TX 75074
nl
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
Internet Address:
http://www.samsung.com
Toll Free Tel: 1.888.987.HELP (4357)
©2013 Samsung Telecommunications America, LLC. Samsung is a registered trademark of Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd.
Do you have questions about your Samsung Mobile Phone? For 24 hour information and assistance, we offer a new FAQ/ARS
System (Automated Response System) at: http://www.samsung.com/us/support.
Nuance®, VSuite™, T9® Text Input, and the Nuance logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Nuance Communications,
Inc., or its affiliates in the United States and/or other countries.
The Bluetooth® word mark, figure mark (stylized “B Design”), and combination mark (Bluetooth word mark and “B Design”) are
registered trademarks and are wholly owned by the Bluetooth SIG.
microSD™ and the microSD logo are Trademarks of the SD Card Association.
Openwave® is a registered Trademark of Openwave, Inc.
LTE is a trademark of ETSI.
Fo
and
are trademarks of SRS Labs, Inc. CS Headphone and WOW HD technologies are incorporated under license
from SRS Labs, Inc.
, DivX®, DivX Certified® and associated logos are trademarks of Rovi Corporation or its subsidiaries and are used under
license.
DivX Certified® to play DivX® video up to HD 720p, including premium content.
nl
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO: DivX® is a digital video format created by DivX, LLC, a subsidiary of Rovi Corporation. This is an official DivX
Certified® device that has passed rigorous testing to verify that it plays DivX video. Visit www.divx.com for more information and
software tools to convert your files into DivX videos.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX Certified® device must be registered in order to play purchased DivX Video-onDemand (VOD) movies. To obtain your registration code, locate the DivX VOD section in your device setup menu (tap Apps >
More > About device > Legal information > License settings > DivX® VOD > Register). Go to vod.divx.com for more
Settings >
information on how to complete your registration.
Google, the Google logo, Android, the Android logo, Google Play, Gmail, Google Mail, Google Maps, Google Music, Google Talk,
Picasa, YouTube and other marks are trademarks of Google Inc.
Wi-Fi is a registered trademark of the Wireless Fidelity Alliance, Inc.
Swype and the Swype logos are trademarks of Swype, Inc. © 2010 Swype, Inc. All rights reserved.
Devices purchased for use on AT&T's system are designed for use exclusively on AT&T's system. You agree that you won't make
any modifications to the Equipment or programming to enable the Equipment to operate on any other system. A voice plan is
required on all voice-capable devices, unless specifically noted otherwise in the terms governing your agreement. Some devices
or plans may require you to subscribe to a data plan.
Fo
Your phone is designed to make it easy for you to access a wide variety of content. For your protection, AT&T wants you to be
aware that some applications that you enable may involve the location of your phone being shared. For applications available
through AT&T, AT&T offers privacy controls that let you decide how an application may use the location of your phone and other
phones on your account. However, AT&T's privacy tools do not apply to applications available outside of AT&T. Please review the
terms and conditions and the associated privacy policy for each location-based service to learn how location information will be
used and protected.
Your phone may be used to access the Internet and to download, and/or purchase goods, applications, and services from AT&T or
elsewhere from third parties. AT&T provides tools for you to control access to the Internet and certain Internet content. These
controls may not be available for certain devices which bypass AT&T controls.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
nl
AT&T may collect certain types of information from your device when you use AT&T services to provide customer support and to
improve its services. For more information on AT&T's Privacy Policy, visit http://www.att.com/privacy.
Your phone features earSmart™, an intelligent voice processor that delivers a clear voice experience, allowing you to hear and be
heard™ in nearly any environment. earSmart technology uses the science of human hearing to distinguish sounds, identify your
voice and suppress surrounding noise, for clear conversations just about anywhere.
How Does It Work?
• The earSmart voice processor in your phone captures your voice and all the sounds around you.
• Working like the human ear, it processes and distinguishes these sounds, isolates your voice conversation, and removes background noise from both ends of a call.
• It also automatically equalizes and adjusts voice volume so you can hear and talk naturally, even in the noisiest places.
• With earSmart technology, you can talk where you want, and have clear conversations for mobile calls, video chats, even speakerphone calls,
Fo
without worrying about surrounding noise.
Table of Contents
Notification Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Memory Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Section 3: Call Functions .............................50
Displaying Your Phone Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Making a Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Making Emergency Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Making a Call Using Speed Dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Making a Call from the Address Book . . . . . . . . . 52
Answering a Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Dialing Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Call Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Call Duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Options During a Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Call Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
Setting Up Your Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Charging a Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Switching the Phone On or Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Locking and Unlocking the Touch Screen . . . . . . 12
Configuring your Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Creating a Samsung Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Creating a New Google Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Retrieving your Google Account Password . . . . . 15
Setting Up Your Voice Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
nl
Section 1: Getting Started ............................. 6
Section 2: Understanding Your Phone ........ 16
Fo
Features of Your Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front View of Your Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Side Views of Your Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear View of Your Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Menu Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Motions and Gestures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Multi Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Customizing Your Home Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16
17
18
19
20
31
32
36
40
Section 4: Entering Text ..............................62
Text Input Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Entering Text Using the Samsung Keyboard . . . . . 62
Changing the Text Input Mode - Keypad . . . . . . . 63
Using ABC Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Using Symbol/Numeric Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
y
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
Section 5: Contacts and Your Address
Book ..........................................................68
Google Play Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Mobile TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
Play Movies & TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Gallery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Using the Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Camera Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
Quick Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Camera and Camcorder Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Editing a Photo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Using the Camcorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
nl
Predictive Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Entering Text Using Handwriting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Samsung Keyboard Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Using the Google Voice Typing Feature . . . . . . . . 65
Entering Text Using Swype . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
AT&T Address Book Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Adding a New Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Editing an Existing Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Using Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Joining Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Synchronizing Accounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Address Book Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Address Book Favorites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Managing Address Book Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Section 6: Multimedia ..................................81
Fo
Samsung Hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Samsung Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
AT&T Locker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Using Playlists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Section 7: Messaging ................................ 103
Types of Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Creating and Sending Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Message Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
Viewing New Received Messages . . . . . . . . . . .106
Deleting Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Message Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Messaging Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Using Email . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Using Gmail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Google Talk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Section 8: Changing Your Settings ........... 118
118
118
119
120
120
121
125
126
126
127
127
127
129
130
131
133
133
138
Fo
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
Accessing Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings Tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wi-Fi Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bluetooth settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
More networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NFC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
S Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Nearby devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Screen Mirroring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Kies via Wi-Fi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lock Screen Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LED indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sound Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Home screen mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Blocking Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power saving mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Accessory Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Accessibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Language and input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Motions and Gestures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Smart screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Air view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Voice control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Add Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Back up and reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Location services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Application Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Date and time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
About Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
115
115
116
117
nl
Google + . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Messenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Messages App . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ChatON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Section 9: Connections ..............................163
Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Wi-Fi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
NFC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
PC Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
y
Local . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
Messenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
Mobile Hotspot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
Mobile TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
My Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
myAT&T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
Optical Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193
Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193
Play Books . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193
Play Magazines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193
Play Movies & TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
Play Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
Play Store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
POLARIS Office 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
S Health . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
S Memo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
S Translator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
S Voice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198
Fo
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
AT&T DriveMode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
AT&T FamilyMap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
AT&T Locker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
AT&T Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
AT&T Smart Wi-Fi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
ChatON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Chrome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Downloads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Email . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Flipboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Gallery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Gmail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Google . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Google + . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Group Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
nl
Section 10: Applications ............................178
UL Certified Travel Charger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Display / Touch-Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
GPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Emergency Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Care and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Responsible Listening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Operating Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility (HAC)
Regulations for Wireless Devices . . . . . . . . . . 227
Restricting Children's Access to Your
Mobile Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
FCC Notice and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Other Important Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . 230
Section 11: Health and Safety
Information ............................................. 208
Section 12: Warranty Information .............232
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
nl
198
199
199
199
199
199
199
200
200
201
201
205
207
Samsung Apps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Samsung Hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Samsung Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Story Album . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Talk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TripAdvisor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Voice Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Voice Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WatchON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
YouTube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
YPmobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fo
Exposure to Radio Frequency (RF) Signals . . . .
Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) Certification
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FCC Part 15 Information to User . . . . . . . . . . . .
Commercial Mobile Alerting System (CMAS) . . .
Smart Practices While Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery Use and Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Samsung Mobile Products and Recycling . . . . .
208
213
215
215
215
217
219
Standard Limited Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
End User License Agreement for Software . . . . . 237
Section 13: Samsung Product
Registration .............................................245
Index ............................................................246
Section 1: Getting Started
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
Prior to use it is necessary to install both the battery and SIM
into their corresponding internal compartments. The
microSD™ card slot is also located in this same internal
area.
1. Remove the back cover by inserting a fingernail into
the slot on the top of your phone (1).
Setting Up Your Phone
2. Lift the cover up (2) and to the right of the phone.
nl
This section explains how to start using your phone by first
configuring your hardware, activating your service, and then
setting up your voice mail.
Caution! Do not bend or twist the back cover excessively.
Doing so may damage the cover.
Fo
Installing the SIM Card
When you subscribe to a cellular network, you are provided
with a plug-in SIM card loaded with your subscription details,
such as your PIN, available optional services, and many
others features.
Getting Started
Correct
Incorrect
Installing the Battery
1. Insert the battery into the opening on the back of the
phone, making sure the connectors align (1).
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
Carefully slide the SIM card into the SIM card socket
(as shown) until the card locks into place.
• Make sure that the card’s gold contacts face into the phone
and that the upper-left angled corner of the card is positioned
as shown.
Fo
䡲
Note: If the card is not inserted correctly, the phone will not
detect the SIM card. Re-orient the card back into the slot
if the SIM is not detected.
nl
Important! The plug-in SIM card information and its contacts
can be easily damaged by scratching or bending,
so be careful when handling, inserting, or
removing the card. Keep all SIM cards out of reach
of small children.
2. Gently press down to secure the battery (2).
Removing and Installing the Memory Card
Push the microSD card into the slot until it clicks (as
shown).
• Make sure the microSD’s gold contact pins face downward and
the card is securely inserted.
Correct
Incorrect
For more information on Memory Cards, see “Memory Card”
on page 48.
Removing the Memory Card
1. Push on the memory card until it clicks and is released.
2. Grasp the memory card and remove it from the phone.
Fo
䡲
nl
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
Note: Your phone has been tested to support up to a 64GB
memory card.
Installing the Memory Card
You can use a microSD (SD) or microSDHC card to
expand available memory space if you desire. This secure
digital card enables you to exchange images, music, and
data between SD-compatible devices. This type of memory
card is designed for use with this mobile phone and other
devices.
Getting Started
Installing the Back Cover
2. Press along the edge of the back cover (3) until you
have a secure seal.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
nl
1. Place the battery cover onto the back of the phone (1)
and press down (2).
Note: Make sure the battery is properly installed before
switching on the phone.
Charging a Battery
Fo
Your device is powered by a rechargeable Li-ion battery. The
Travel Charger that is used to charge the battery, is included
with your device. Use only Samsung-approved batteries and
chargers.
y
Note: You must fully charge the battery before using your
phone for the first time. A discharged battery recharges
fully in approximately 4 hours.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
Although you can use the phone while the battery is
charging, doing so will require additional charging time.
Using the Travel Charger
nl
Note: Long backlight settings, searching for service, vibrate
mode, web browser use, and other variables may
reduce the battery’s talk and standby times.
Fo
Important! Verify that the handset battery is installed prior to
connection. If the battery is not properly installed
and the wall charger is connected, the handset
may power off and on continuously, preventing
proper operation.
Correct
Incorrect
1. Plug the flat end of the Travel Charger into the Power/
Accessory Interface connector and the other end into a
standard AC wall outlet.
2. When charging is finished, remove the flat end from
the interface connector jack on the phone.
Getting Started
10
Note: Failure to unplug the wall charger before you remove the
battery, can cause damage to the phone.
Low Battery Indicator
When the battery is weak and only a few minutes of talk time
remain, the battery icon ( ) blinks and the device sounds a
warning tone at regular intervals. In this condition, your
phone conserves its remaining battery power, not by turning
off the backlight, but by entering the dimming mode. For a
quick check of your battery level, glance at the battery
charge indicator located in the upper-right corner of your
device’s display. Solid color ( ) indicates a full charge.
Fo
When the battery level becomes too low, the phone
automatically turns off.
11
You can also choose to display a percentage value. Having a
percentage value on-screen can provide a better idea of the
remaining charge on the battery.
From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
My device ➔ Display ➔ Display battery percentage.
My device
nl
䡲
Switching the Phone On or Off
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
Warning! If your handset has a touch screen display, please
note that a touch screen responds best to a light
touch from the pad of your finger. Using excessive
force or a metallic object when pressing on the touch
screen may damage the tempered glass surface and
void the warranty. For more information, refer to
“Standard Limited Warranty” on page 232.
1. Press and hold
on.
until the phone switches
2. Swipe your finger across the screen to unlock the
phone.
Configuring your Phone
3. To switch off the phone, press and hold
until the Device options screen displays.
4. Tap Power off to switch off the phone.
5. At the Power off prompt, tap OK.
Locking and Unlocking the Touch
Screen
1. Press
nl
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
Note: The display language is preset to English at the factory.
To change the language, use the Language menu. For
more information, refer to “Changing Your Settings” on
page 118.
When you first turn on your phone, you will need to set up a
few things.
1. The Welcome to AT&T Ready2Go! screen displays. The
default language for your phone is English. If you would
like to select another language, tap English and scroll
up or down to select one of the listed languages.
to lock the touch screen.
2. Press
again to display the lock screen
then swipe your finger across the screen to unlock.
Fo
Note: Swipe is the default screen locking method. To change
your screen lock, see “Lock Screen Settings” on
page 127.
2. Tap the Accessibility box at the bottom of the screen to
modify any of the Accessibility function if you desire.
For more information, refer to “Accessory Settings” on
page 139.
3. Tap Next.
4. At the Got Google? display, tap Yes if you already have a
Google account and sign in to your account, or tap No if
you do not have a Google account.
5. If you answered No in step 4, tap Get an account and
follow the on-screen instructions to create a new
Google account or sign in to an existing account.
If you want to wait until later to create a Google
account, tap Not now.
Getting Started
12
y
11. At the Samsung account display, tap Create new
account if you don’t have one yet or tap Sign in if you
have already set up your Samsung account. For more
information, refer to “Creating a Samsung Account”
on page 14.
– or –
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
6. At the Google & location screen, a blue checkmark
displays next to the text that explains that you allow
Google’s location service to collect anonymous location
data from your phone. If you disagree, tap the
checkmark to remove it.
10. Tap Next.
nl
Note: In order to utilize your device to the fullest extent, you
will need to create a Google™ Account when you first
use your device. With a Google Account, you will have
access to more Google applications and applications will
always be in sync between your phone and computer.
7. A blue checkmark also displays next to the text that
explains that you allows your location to be used for
Google search results and other Google services. If you
disagree, tap the checkmark to remove it. Tap the Next
icon
8. At the This phone belongs to... display, enter your First
and Last names in the provided fields so that your
phone can personalize some applications. Tap
13
Fo
9. At the Set up email display, tap an Email account to set
up your email. For more information, refer to “Using
Email” on page 111.
Tap Skip if you want to wait until later.
12. At the Thank you screen, enter a device name (optional)
and tap Next.
13. At the Learn about key features display, tap each
function to learn more about them.
14. Tap Finish to complete your setup.
15. At the AT&T Locker Setup display, tap Sign Up for AT&T
Locker or tap Skip if you want to sign up later. For more
information, refer to “AT&T Locker” on page 179.
The main Home screen displays.
Creating a Samsung Account
Creating a New Google Account
Samsung account.
nl
If you did not create a new account during the setup
procedure when you first turned your phone on, follow these
steps:
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Gmail
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
2. Tap
3. Tap Create new account.
In order to utilize your device to the fullest extent, you will
need to create a Google™ Account when you first use your
device. With a Google Account, Google applications will
always be in sync between your phone and computer.
An active Samsung account is required to begin accessing
applications such as ChatON and Samsung Hub. If you did
not create a Samsung account when you first set up your
phone, follow these steps:
➔
1. From the home screen, tap
➔ Settings
Accounts ➔ Add account.
The Add a Google Account screen displays.
4. Enter the required information and tap Sign up.
5. Tap Terms and conditions to read them and tap
6. Tap all of the other headings to read them and tap
7. Tap the I accept all the terms above checkbox.
8. Tap Agree.
9. At the Welcome screen, tap Next.
Fo
10. Follow the on-screen instructions to verify your email
address and activate your account.
2. Tap New to create a new Google account.
– or –
If you already have a Google account, tap Existing to
sign in and add the account to your phone.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions to add a Google
Account.
Note: Once you have created a Google account, you only need
to sign in.
Getting Started
14
Accessing Your Voice Mail
Retrieving your Google Account
Password
1. From the Home screen, tap
2. Click on the Can’t access your account? link.
4. Enter your Email address and click Continue.
Setting Up Your Voice Mail
, then tap
2. Follow the tutorial to create a password, record a
greeting, and record your name.
Fo
Note: These steps may be different depending on your
network.
15
nl
1. Dial your wireless phone number.
3. Enter your password.
5. Follow the password recovery procedure.
1. From the Home screen, tap
Accessing Your Voice Mail From Another Phone
2. When you hear your voicemail greeting, press the
asterisk key on the phone you are using.
3. Tap the I don’t know my password radio button.
2. When connected, follow the voice prompts from the
voice mail center.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
A Google account password is required for Google
applications. If you misplace or forget your Google Account
password, follow these instructions to retrieve it:
1. From your computer, use an Internet browser and
navigate to http://google.com/accounts.
, then tap
You may be prompted to enter a password.
Section 2: Understanding Your Phone
Your phone is lightweight, easy-to-use and offers many
useful features. The following list outlines a few of the
features included in your phone.
• LTE network (5-6 bands) with ??? gigahertz quad-core processor
• Android v 4.2.2, Jelly Bean Platform
• Brilliant ???” Full HD Super AMOLED display
• Touch screen provides quick response to a variety of in-phone
menus and options including applications, multi-windows and up
to seven home screens.
• Smart Switch™ compliant. For more information, see
www.samsungsmartswitch.com.
Plus (HSPA+).
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
Features of Your Phone
• 8 Megapixel camera and camcorder with Front Facing camera
• Smart Remote using WatchON
• AT&T GPS Navigation functionality provides real-time navigation
• Delivers data faster using 4G LTE and High Speed Packet Access
nl
This section outlines some key features of your phone and
describes the screen and the icons that appear when the phone
is in use. It also shows how to navigate through the phone and
provides information on using a memory card.
Fo
• Ready access to the Internet
• Built-in Bluetooth and advanced Wi-Fi® technology
• Mobile Hotspot and USB Tethering capability
• Up to 64GB expandable memory slot
• 16 GB memory and 2 GB RAM
• Corporate and Personal Email
• Sync and update social network applications
• Over 650,000 Apps available to download via Google Play
Store™ and Samsung Hub
• Full Integration of Google Mobile™ Services (Gmail, YouTube,
Google Maps, Google Voice Search)
• Multiple Messaging Options: Text/Picture/Video Messaging, and
Instant Messaging with Google Talk™
• DivX Certified® to play DivX® video up to HD 1080p, including
premium content
• Samsung Link to share your media content across DLNA certified
devices
Understanding Your Phone
16
1
14
2. Light (RGB) Sensor: lets you use the ambient light level
to adjust the screen brightness/contrast. This sensor
decreases screen brightness in dim light.
13
3. External speaker: allows you to hear the caller.
12
11
10
Fo
1. Status light: displays red when charging, green when
fully charged, blue when powering up, and orange
when a notification has arrived.
17
nl
4. Application icons: you can place shortcuts to your
favorite applications on the Home screen.
5. Primary shortcuts: allows quick access to important
features such as Phone, Contacts, Messaging, Internet,
and Apps. For more information, refer to “Primary
Shortcuts” on page 20.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
Front View of Your Phone
6. Menu key: allows you to access sub-menus with
additional options for different features and
applications such as Home screen, Phone, Contacts,
Messaging, and Web.
7. Home key: allows you to return to the main Home
screen from any Home screen or menu. Press and hold
to display Recent apps, Task Manager, and Google
Search. Quickly press twice to activate the S Voice
application.
8. Back key: allows you step backwards when navigating
a menu or web page.
9. Home screen indicator: shows which Home screen is
presently displayed.
Side Views of Your Phone
10. Google Quick Search bar: a shortcut to Google Search
that allows you to search for items on the internet.
nl
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
12. Indicator icons: shows the information needed to
operate your phone, such as the received signal
strength, phone battery level, time, unread Emails,
missed calls, etc.
11. Weather widget: displays Time, Day, Date,
Temperature and weather conditions for your area.
13. Front facing camera: allows you to take pictures of
yourself when you set the camera shooting mode to
Self shot.
14. Proximity and Light sensors: uses the ambient light
level to adjust keypad access. If the light path is
blocked, for example, when holding the phone close to
your ear, the touch screen will turn off.
Fo
Understanding Your Phone
18
Rear View of Your Phone
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
nl
1. 3.5mm Headset jack: allows you to plug in headphones.
2. Volume keys: allow you to adjust the ringer volume
while in standby mode or adjust the voice volume
during a call. When receiving an incoming call, briefly
press down either volume key (
) to mute
the ring tone. Adjusts text size when reading a
message.
3. Microphone: allows other callers to hear you when you
are speaking to them. It is also used for the
Speakerphone.
4. Power/Accessory Interface connector: allows you to
connect a Travel Charger or other optional accessories
such as a USB/data cable or a hands-free headset for
convenient, hands-free conversations.
5. Power/Lock key: (
) lets you power your
phone on and off. Also allows you to lock or unlock the
touch screen. For more information on locking your
phone, see “Locking and Unlocking the Phone” on
page 34.
19
Fo
6. Microphone: used for noise cancellation and stereo
recording.
1. Camera lens: is used to take pictures and shoot videos.
2. External speaker: allows you to hear when the
Speakerphone is turned on.
3. Flash: is used to provide adequate light when taking
pictures in dark places.
Indicator Icons
Primary Shortcuts
Indicates that the Airplane Mode is active. You
cannot send or receive any calls or access online
information.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
There are four non-movable Application Shortcuts that
appear at the bottom of all Home screens. The default
shortcuts are:
• Phone for dialing a number.
This list identifies the symbols you’ll see on your phone’s
display and Indicator area:
Displays your current signal strength. The greater
the number of bars, the stronger the signal.
Your display screen provides a wealth of information about
the phone’s status and options, as well as providing access
to application icons. For more information, refer to “Front
View of Your Phone” on page 17.
nl
Display Layout
• Contacts
for managing your contacts in your Address Book.
• Messaging
for creating and viewing Messages.
• Internet
for surfing the Internet.
• Apps
for accessing the applications on your phone.
Displays when there is no SIM card in the phone.
Displays when there is no network available.
Displays when your phone is in Blocking mode.
Displays when there is a system error or alert.
For more information, refer to “Adding and Removing
Primary Shortcuts” on page 42.
Displays to indicate a security warning. You are
prompted to set a screen lock password.
Fo
You can change the Phone, Messaging, S Note, and Internet
application shortcuts to any icon that is displayed in the Apps
menu.
Displays when a call is in progress.
Understanding Your Phone
20
Device Power Critical – Shows your current battery
only has less than 5 percent power remaining and
will immediately shutdown.
Displays when your connection to an EDGE network
is active.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
Displays when a call has been missed.
Displays when the speakerphone is on.
Device Power Very Low – Shows your current
battery only has between 5 and 15 percent power
remaining.
nl
Displays when a call is on hold.
Displays when a call has been muted.
Displays when Call forwarding is set to Always
forward. For more information, refer to “Call
forwarding” on page 61.
Displays your battery charge level. Icon shown is
fully charged.
Displays when your battery is charging. Also
displays battery charge level.
21
Fo
Device Power Low – Shows your current battery
only has between 15 and 28 percent power
remaining.
Displays when your phone is communicating with
the EDGE network.
Displays when your connection to a UTMS, HSDPA,
HSPA, or HSPA+ network is active.
Displays when your phone is communicating with
the UTMS, HSDPA, HSPA, or HSPA+ network.
Displays when your connection to a 4G LTE network
is active.
Displays when your phone is communicating with
the 4G LTE network.
y
Displays when you set an alarm to ring at a specified
time. For more information, refer to “Alarm” on page
182.
Displays when the Sound profile is set to Mute.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
Displays when a Play Store download has
completed.
Displays when the time and date for a Calendar Event
has arrived. For more information, refer to
“Calendar” on page 180.
nl
Displays when your phone is downloading or has
downloaded a file. It will blink green when it is
installing.
Displays when the an outbound file transfer is in
progress.
Displays when updates are available for download.
Displays when the Sound profile is set to Vibrate.
Displays when the phone is connected to a
computer via a supported USB cable connection.
Displays when Bluetooth is activated.
Displays when the phone is tethered via a
supported USB cable connection.
Displays when a new text or multimedia message
is received.
Displays when a Bluetooth device has been paired
with the phone.
Displays when a new voice mail is received.
Fo
Displays when Email is received.
Displays when Wi-Fi is connected, active, and
communicating with a Wireless Access Point
(WAP).
Displays when there is a Wi-Fi access point
available but you are not connected to it. May also
display if there is a communication issue with the
target Wireless Access Point (WAP).
Understanding Your Phone
22
Displays when TTY device has been inserted.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
Displays when GPS is active and acquiring a signal.
Displays when the uploaded or transferred file was
successfully delivered.
Displays when your phone as been configured as a
portable Wi-Fi hotspot.
Displays when a file is being uploaded or sync’d
between your device and an external Web storage
location.
nl
Displays when Wi-Fi Direct is active and your phone
is connected to another device.
Displays when data synchronization and
application sync is active and synchronization is in
progress for Gmail, Calendar, and Contacts.
Displays when your phone is connecting to the
Device Management server when you first turn on
your phone.
Displays when a screen capture has been taken.
Displays when the keypad is active.
Displays when an emergency call is taking place.
Displays when Near Field Communication (NFC)
has been activated.
23
Fo
Displays when your device is connected being used
to control streaming media and is connected to a
Digital Living Network Alliance (DLNA) certified
device using the Samsung Link application.
For more details on configuring your phone’s settings, see
“Changing Your Settings” on page 118.
AT&T Locker: AT&T Locker allows you to store, share,
and sync all of your photos, videos, and documents in
one safe, convenient place; the AT&T cloud. For more
information, refer to “AT&T Locker” on page 86.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
The following table contains a description of each
application. If the application is already described in another
section of this user manual, then a cross reference to that
particular section is provided.
AT&T FamilyMap: provides peace of mind by being able
to conveniently locate a family member from your
wireless phone or PC and know that your family's
location information is secure and private. For more
information, refer to “AT&T FamilyMap” on page 178.
The Apps menu provides quick access to the items you use
most frequently.
nl
Application Icons
For information on navigating through the Apps icons, see
“Navigating Through the Application Menus” on page 35.
1. From the Home screen, tap
, then tap one of the
application icons.
2. Follow the on-screen instructions.
3. To return to the main Home screen, tap
The following applications are available:
Fo
AT&T DriveMode: With the AT&T DriveMode
application, you can set your phone to auto reply when
you are driving and don’t want to answer the phone.
You can set auto reply to Messages, Emails, and Phone
Calls. You can also allow up to five of your contacts to
contact you while you are in Drive mode. For more
information, refer to “AT&T DriveMode” on page 178.
AT&T Navigator: AT&T Navigator provides you with
access to real-time GPS-driven applications. These
programs not only allow you to achieve turn-by-turn
navigation, but also access local searches based on a
variety of category parameters. For more information,
refer to “AT&T Navigator” on page 179.
AT&T Smart Wi-Fi: With AT&T Smart Wi-Fi, you can
maximize your battery performance, maximize your
data, simplify access to AT&T Hot Spots and Wi-Fi
networks, automate your Wi-Fi connections, and track
your data use. For more information, refer to “AT&T
Smart Wi-Fi” on page 173.
Understanding Your Phone
24
y
Contacts: You can manage your daily contacts by
storing their name and number in your Address Book.
You can also synchronize your phone Address Book
with AT&T Address Book, the network backup service.
For more information, refer to “Contacts and Your
Address Book” on page 68.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
Calendar: With the Calendar application, you can
consult the calendar by day, week, month, year, create
events, and set an alarm to act as a reminder, if
necessary. For more information, refer to “Calendar”
on page 180.
Clock: The Clock application allows you to access
alarms, view the World Clock, set a stopwatch, use a
timer, and setup a Desk Clock. For more information,
refer to “Clock” on page 182.
nl
Calculator: Using this feature you can use the phone as
a calculator. The calculator provides the basic
arithmetic functions; addition, subtraction,
multiplication, and division. You can also use this as a
scientific calculator. For more information, refer to
“Calculator” on page 180.
Camera: Use your 13.0 megapixel camera feature to
produce photos and videos. For more information, refer
to “Camera” on page 95.
Downloads: The Downloads application allows you to
manage all of your downloads from the Play Store and
the Browser. For more information, refer to
“Downloads” on page 185.
ChatON: With the ChatON application, you can interact
with friends and family with text, images, hand-written
notes and video shared instantly. You can also chat in
groups. For more information, refer to “ChatON” on
page 182.
Email: Email enables you to review and create email
using various email services. You can also receive text
message alerts when you receive an important email.
For more information, refer to “Using Email” on page
111.
25
Fo
Chrome: The Google Chrome app allows you to use the
Google Chrome web browser on your phone. For more
information, refer to “Chrome” on page 182.
y
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
Gallery: The Gallery is where you view photos and play
back videos. For photos, you can also perform basic
editing tasks, view a slideshow, set photos as
wallpaper or contact image, and share as a picture
message. For more information, refer to “Gallery” on
page 92.
Google+: makes messaging and sharing with your
friends a lot easier. You can set up Circles of friends,
visit the Stream to get updates from your Circles, use
Messenger for fast messaging with everyone in your
Circles, or use Instant Upload to automatically upload
videos and photos to your own private album on
Google+. For more information, refer to “Google +” on
page 115.
nl
Flipboard: This application creates a personalized
digital magazine out of everything being shared with
you. Access news stories, personal feeds and other
related material. For more information, refer to
“Flipboard” on page 186.
Gmail: Gmail is a web-based email service. Gmail is
configured when you first set up your phone.
Depending on your synchronization settings, Gmail
can automatically synchronize with your Gmail
account on the web. For more information, refer to
“Using Gmail” on page 113.
Fo
Google: The Google Search application is the same onscreen Internet search engine that is on the Google
Search Bar on your main Home screen. For more
information, see “Google Search Bar” on page 31.
Group Play: Group Play allows you to share pictures,
music, and documents in real-time with your friends.
For more information, refer to “Group Play” on page
187.
Help: The Help application allows you to get more
information on your phone features, applications,
settings, accessories, and access to online help. For
more information, refer to “Help” on page 188.
Internet: Open the web browser to start surfing the
web. The browser is fully optimized and comes with
advanced functionality to enhance the Internet
browsing feature on your phone. For more information,
refer to “Internet” on page 163.
Understanding Your Phone
26
Messenger: Messenger allows you to bring groups of
friends together into a simple group conversation.
When you get a new conversation in Messenger,
Google+ sends an update to your phone. For more
information, refer to “Messenger” on page 115.
Maps: Depending on your location, you can view basic,
custom, and satellite maps and local business
information, including locations, contact information,
and driving directions. You can also post public
messages about a location and track your friends. For
more information, refer to “Maps” on page 189.
Mobile Hotspot: This application allows you to share
your phones’s mobile data connection as a portable
Wi-Fi hotspot. For more information, refer to “Tethering
& portable hotspot” on page 123.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
nl
Local: Local is an application that uses Google Maps
and your location to help you find Restaurants, Cafes,
Bars, Attractions, and more. You can also add your own
locations. For more information, refer to “Local” on
page 188.
Messages: AT&T Messages brings your texts, calls, and
voicemail messages together into a single
conversation thread and is accessible by phone or
computer. For more information, refer to “Messages
App” on page 116.
27
Fo
Messaging: You can send and receive different types of
messages. For more information, refer to “Messaging”
on page 103.
Mobile TV: Mobile TV is a subscription service that
allows you to watch your favorite TV shows using your
handset. For more information, refer to “Mobile TV” on
page 90.
Music: The Music app allows you to play music files that
you have stored on your phone and memory card. You
can also create playlists. For more information, refer to
“Music” on page 87.
My Files: My Files allows you to manage your sounds,
images, videos, bluetooth files, Android files, and other
memory card data in one convenient location. For more
information, refer to “My Files” on page 190.
Play Magazines: With Google Play Magazines, you can
subscribe to your favorite magazines and have them
available to read on your phone at any time or any
place. For more information, refer to “Play Magazines”
on page 193.
Navigation: Navigation is an internet-connected GPS
navigation system with voice guidance. You can type or
speak your destination. For more information, refer to
“Navigation” on page 192.
Play Movies & TV: With Google Play Movies & TV, you can
rent thousands of different movies and television
shows. You can watch instantly, or download your
movie or show for offline viewing at a later time. For
more information, refer to “Play Movies & TV” on page
92.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
nl
myAT&T: myAT&T allows you to manage your own AT&T
account. You can review and pay your bill, check
minutes and data usage, upgrade to a new device, or
change your rate plan. For more information, refer to
“myAT&T” on page 191.
Optical Reader: The Optical reader allows you to use
your camera to identify text and extract useful
information. For more information, refer to “Optical
Reader” on page 193.
Phone: Allows you to access the dialer keypad, call
logs, and favorites. For more information, refer to “Call
Functions” on page 50.
Fo
Play Books: With Google Play Books, you can find
more than 3 million free e-books and hundreds of
thousands more to buy in the eBookstore. For more
information, refer to “Play Books” on page 193.
Play Music: With the Music application, while online, you can
play music that you have added to your music file as well as
any music you copied from your PC. While offline, you can
listen to music you have copied from your PC. For more
information, refer to “Google Play Music” on page 90.
Play Store: The Play Store provides access to
downloadable applications and games to install on
your phone. For more information, refer to “Play Store”
on page 194.
Understanding Your Phone
28
y
Samsung Hub: Samsung Hub is Samsung’s integrated
store for media content that offers a comprehensive
and consistent media service experience. You can
browse and purchase all media content within a single
store front. For more information, refer to “Samsung
Hub” on page 81.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
S Health: S Health is a wellness application that allows
you to better manage your health by providing you with
relevant information. For more information, refer to “S
Health” on page 195.
Samsung Apps: With Samsung Apps, you can
download hundred of applications from a variety of
categories. For more information, refer to “Samsung
Apps” on page 198.
nl
POLARIS Office 5: POLARIS® Office 5 is a Microsoft
Office compatible office suite. This application
provides a central place for managing your documents
online or offline. For more information, refer to
“POLARIS Office 5” on page 195.
S Memo: Use this application to create memos using
existing templates or your own design. You can use
handwriting or the keyboard to enter text. For more
information, refer to “S Memo” on page 195.
S Translator: With the S Translator you can easily
translate words and phrases into many different
languages. For more information, refer to “S
Translator” on page 197.
29
Fo
S Voice: With the S Voice application you can use your
voice to perform operations that you would normally
have to do by hand such as dialing a phone number,
texting a message, playing music, etc. For more
information, refer to “S Voice” on page 198.
Samsung Link: With the Samsung Link app, you can
share and play content across smart devices anytime
and anywhere. For more information, refer to
“Samsung Link” on page 84.
Settings: This icon navigates to the sound and phone
settings for your phone. It includes such settings as:
display, security, memory, and any extra settings
associated with your phone. For more information,
refer to “Changing Your Settings” on page 118.
y
Voice Search: The Google Voice Search application
allows you to search the web using only your voice. For
more information, refer to “Voice Search” on page
201.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
Talk: Google Talk is a free Windows and web-based
application for instant messaging offered by Google.
Conversation logs are automatically saved to a Chats
area in your Gmail account. This allows you to search
a chat log and store them in your Gmail accounts. For
more information, refer to “Google Talk” on page 115.
Voice Recorder: The Voice Recorder allows you to
record an audio file up to one minute long and then
immediately send it as a message. For more
information, refer to “Voice Recorder” on page 200.
nl
Story Album: With Story Album, you can create a digital
Album of your story in media. Special moments will be
on a timeline, and if you wish, you can have your album
published as a hard copy. For more information, refer
to “Story Album” on page 199.
WatchON: With the WatchON application, you can use
your phone as a remote control for your TV. For more
information, refer to “WatchON” on page 201.
YouTube: YouTube is a video sharing website on which
users can upload and share videos, and view them in
MPEG-4 format. For more information, refer to
“YouTube” on page 205.
Video: The Video application plays video files stored on
your phone or microSD card. For more information,
refer to “Video” on page 91.
YPmobile: The YPmobile (Yellowpages) application
provides quick and ready access to businesses, map
locations, and storage of your favorite searches. For
more information, refer to “YPmobile” on page 207.
Fo
TripAdvisor: With the TripAdvisor, you can plan and
have your perfect trip. With over 75 million reviews and
opinions by travelers, it is easy to find the best hotels,
restaurants, and fun things to do. For more information,
refer to “TripAdvisor” on page 199.
Understanding Your Phone
30
Press
Menu to display a context-sensitive menu of
options for the current screen or feature.
Home Key
Press
Home to display the main Home screen. Press
and hold to display recently used apps and access the Task
manager.
Back Key
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
The Google Search Bar provides you an on-screen Internet
search engine powered by Google™.
1. From the main Home screen, tap the Google Search
bar
2. Use the on-screen keypad to enter the item you want
to search for, then tap
3. Tap
to use Google Voice Search. Follow the
on-screen instructions.
Fo
You can tailor the phone’s range of functions to fit your needs
using both menus and widgets. Menus, sub-menus, and
features can be accessed by scrolling through the available
on-screen menus. Your phone originally has three home
screens but you can expand up to seven home screens.
31
Menu Key
nl
Google Search Bar
Menu Navigation
Command Keys
Tip: To open applications quickly, add the icons of frequentlyused applications to the Home screen or to the folders you
created. For details, see “Customizing Your Home Screen”
on page 40.
Press
step.
Back to return to the previous screen, option or
Terms used in this user manual
Tap
Lightly touch items to select or launch them. For example:
• Tap the on screen keyboard to enter characters or text.
• Tap a menu item to select it.
• Tap an application’s icon to launch the application.
Touch and Hold
Activate on-screen items by a touch and hold gesture. For
example:
• Touch and hold a widget on the home screen to move it.
• Scrolling through the Home screen or a menu
Panning
To pan, touch and hold a selected icon, then move the device
to the left or right to reposition it to another page. You must
first activate Motion on your device. Use panning to:
• Move icons on your Home screens or Application Menus to
another page.
Tilt
Using Motions and Gestures
By activating the various motion and gesture features, you
can access a variety of time saving functions.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
To palm swipe, swipe the side of your hand horizontally
across the screen. Use palm swipe when:
• Capturing the screen
Turn your phone over so that the screen faces downward. For
example:
• Mute incoming calls and playing sounds by turning your phone
over.
To swipe, lightly drag your finger vertically or horizontally
across the screen. Use swipe when:
• Unlocking the screen
Turn over
nl
• Touch and hold on a field to display a pop-up menu of options.
Swipe and Palm Swipe
Fo
To activate the tilt feature, press and hold two points on the
screen then tilt the device back and forth to reduce or
enlarge the screen. Use tilt to:
• Reduce or enlarge the screen in the Gallery or Browser.
Caution! Excessive shaking or impact to the device may cause
unintended results. To learn how to properly control
Apps ➔ Settings ➔
My
motions, tap
device ➔ Motions and gestures. When tapped, each
entry comes with an on-screen tutorial.
My device
• Air gesture: Allows you to control your device by performing
motions above the sensor (without touching the device).
• Motion: Allows you to control your device using natural
movements (on the screen).
• Palm motion: Allows you to control your device by touching the
screen with your entire hand.
Understanding Your Phone
32
My device
The Air gesture icon
will appear in the status bar.
3. Read the on-screen notification and tap OK.
Note: At least one feature must be activated before Air gesture
can be activated.
4. Tap Learn about the sensor and icon field to review
on-screen information about the Air gestures sensor
and related icon.
Fo
5. Tap the ON/OFF slider located to the right of each
feature to turn it on
33
3. Read the on-screen notification and tap OK.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
2. Tap the ON/OFF slider located to the right of Air gesture
to turn it on
My device
2. Tap the ON/OFF slider located to the right of Motion to
turn it on
To activate Air gesture:
1. From the Home screen, press
and then tap
Settings ➔
My device ➔ Motions and gestures
➔ Air gesture.
To activate Motion:
1. From the Home screen, press
and then tap
Settings ➔
My device ➔ Motions and gestures.
nl
• Gyroscope calibration: Allows you to properly calibrate your
device’s touch screen.
Note: At least one feature must be activated before Motion can
be activated.
4. Tap the ON/OFF slider located to the right of each
feature to turn it on
To activate Palm Motion:
1. From the Home screen, press
and then tap
Settings ➔
My device ➔ Motions and gestures.
My device
2. In a single motion touch and slide the Palm motion
slider to the right to turn it on.
3. Read the on-screen notification and tap OK.
Note: At least one feature must be activated before Palm
motion can be activated.
Locking and Unlocking the Phone
located on the upper
Your phone originally has three home screens but you can
expand up to seven home screens. If you like, you can place
different applications on each of the home screens.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
To unlock your phone:
1. Press the lock button
right side of your phone.
Navigating Through the Home Screens
For more information, refer to “Motions and Gestures” on
page 147.
to give you instant access to information and applications.
This is the default page and accessible from any menu by
pressing
nl
4. Tap the ON/OFF slider located to the right of each
feature to turn it on
䡲
2. The lock screen will display with Swipe screen to
unlock displayed at the bottom of the screen.
3. Swipe the touch screen in any direction.
From the main Home screen, sweep the screen with
your finger in either direction. The main Home Screen
is located in the middle with a Home screen on each
side.
4. The Home screen will be displayed.
Note: There are several additional ways you can lock your
screen. For more information, refer to “Lock Screen
Settings” on page 127.
Home Screen Overview
Fo
The main home screen is the starting point for many
applications and functions, and it allows you to add items
like application icons, shortcuts, folders, or Google widgets
Understanding Your Phone
34
Navigating Using Sub-Menus
Sub-menus are available when you are at any Home screen
or have selected a feature or application such as Phone,
Contacts, Messaging, or Internet.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
2. Sweep the screen left or right to access the other two
menus.
Note: As you add applications, the number of Application
menus that you have available will increase.
Your phone initially has three Application Menus available.
Follow these steps to navigate through the Application
Menus:
1. At the Home screen, tap
. The first Application
Menu will be displayed.
nl
Navigating Through the Application Menus
3. Tap one of the application icons.
To access a sub-menu:
1. Press
35
Fo
A sub-menu will appear at the bottom of the phone
screen.
2. Tap an option.
2. Tap an icon to open the selected application.
– or –
Tap
to go to the Task manager.
– or –
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
Sub-Menu items
to go to Google Search.
nl
Tap
– or –
Tap
to delete the record of all recently used
applications.
Using the Multi Window
This feature allows you to run multiple applications on the
current screen at the same time.
Accessing Recently-Used Apps
Fo
1. Press and hold
from any screen to open the
recently-used applications window.
Note: Only applications found within the Multi window panel
can be active atop another current application on the
screen.
When launching applications that contain multimedia
files (music/video), audio from both files will be played
simultaneously.
Understanding Your Phone
36
2. Tap the tab to open the application panel showing
all the available Multi window apps.
To deactivate Multi window:
䡲
Press and hold the Back key (
). This action hides
the Multi window tab from view.
Repositioning the Multi Window
The Multi window contains two components: tab and apps
panel. The tab can be manually moved across the screen.
The apps panel (containing the scrollable apps) can be
relocated to lock onto the different sides of the screen
(top/bottom/left/right).
Fo
To move the tab:
1. Activate the Multi window feature.
37
Note: This is a quick way to get the tab out of the way if you
can’t get to a button or option behind it.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
Note: Initially open activation, the entire apps panel is briefly
displayed, then minimized to only show the tab.
To activate Multi window:
1. Press and hold the Back key (
). The Multi window
tab appears (by default) on the left side of the screen.
2. In a single motion, touch and hold the tab for
approximately one-second, then slowly drag it to its
new location along the current screen edge.
nl
Activating and Deactivating Multi window
To rearrange the Multi window applications:
1. Activate the Multi window feature.
2. Tap the tab to display the apps panel (containing the
scrollable apps).
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
3. In a single motion, touch and hold the tab for
approximately one-second to detach it from the
screen (1), then slowly drag it to its new location along
any other available screen edge (2). You can move it to
the top, bottom, or either side.
The applications found within the apps panel of the Multi
window can be organized by either being rearranged or
removed.
2. Tap the tab to display the apps panel (containing the
scrollable apps).
Customizing the Multi Window apps
nl
To relocate the Multi window apps panel:
1. Activate the Multi window feature.
3. In a single motion, touch and hold a desired app until it
detaches from the panel, then carefully drag it to a new
location in the list of apps. Lift your finger or stylus off
the screen to let go of the app and drop it into its new
location.
To remove a Multi window application:
1. Activate the Multi window feature.
2. Tap the tab to display the apps panel (containing the
scrollable apps).
Fo
3. Tap the Edit button (located at the bottom of the list) to
reveal a staging area that can house any removed
applications from the Multi window panel.
Understanding Your Phone
38
2. Tap the tab to display the apps panel (containing the
scrollable apps).
4. Locate the desired application.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
3. Tap the Edit button (located at the bottom of the list) to
reveal the staging area containing any previously
removed apps.
5. In a single motion, touch and hold a desired app until it
detaches from the staging area, then carefully drag it
to a new location in the current list of apps.
Using Multi Window to run multiple apps on the
same screen
Any of the apps found within the Multi window panel can be
run at the same time as a current on-screen app.
Fo
Once multiple apps are running on the same screen, you can
then choose to either swap their positions or maximize a
desired app.
39
To restore a Multi window application:
1. Activate the Multi window feature.
Note: Only applications found within the Multi-window panel
can be active atop another current application on the
screen.
When launching applications that contain multimedia
files (music/video), audio from both files will be played
simultaneously.
nl
4. Tap Done once you have completed the removal
process.
In this example we will be launching both the Internet and
Maps applications.
1. Launch an application such as Maps.
• From the Home screen, tap Internet
2. Activate the Multi window feature.
3. Tap the tab to display the apps panel.
4. Touch and hold the desired app, such as Maps, until it
detaches from the panel.
5. In a single motion, drag it over the current app and
drop the new Multi window app over either the top or
bottom area of the current on-screen app.
3. Locate and tap
(Switch app location).
The current apps are
switched.
2. In a single motion, touch and hold the Border bar then
drag it to resize the desired window.
nl
Split/Maximize
To split the current applications:
1. With the two applications shown in a split screen, tap
the Border bar to show the on-screen icons.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
2. Tap the desired
application area (top or
bottom).
App #1
2. Tap the desired application area (top or bottom).
3. Locate and tap
(Maximize the app). The current
apps are the both maximized.
䡲
To exit the Multi window app, tap
Customizing Your Home Screen
You can customize your Home screen by doing the following:
• Creating Shortcuts
Exit
App #2 Border Switch
bar Positions
Fo
To switch the arrangement of
the applications:
1. With the two
applications shown in a
split screen, tap the
Border bar to show the
on-screen icons.
To increase the size of a desired application window:
1. With the two applications shown in a split screen,
locate the Border bar indicating the edge of the app
window.
Note: Once two applications are running, the device displays a
split screen view containing both the initial app and the
new Multi window app. Each application is still
independent of the other.
• Adding and Removing Primary Shortcuts
• Adding and Removing Widgets
• Moving Icons in the Apps Menu
• Creating Application Folders
Understanding Your Phone
40
6. While still holding the on-screen icon, position it on the
current page. Once complete, release the screen to
lock the new shortcut into its new position on the
current screen.
Adding a shortcut via the Add to Home screen
1. Press
to activate the main Home screen.
Creating Shortcuts
2. Navigate to the desired Home Page.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
Shortcuts are different than the current Home screen
Widgets that only launch an application. Shortcuts activate a
feature, action, or launch an application.
nl
• Adding a New Page to the Application Menu
• Changing the Wallpaper
• Adding and Deleting Home Screens
• Moving Home Screens
3. Touch and hold on an empty area of the Home screen.
4. Tap Apps and widgets, Folder, or Page.
Note: To move a shortcut from one screen to another, it must
first be deleted from its current screen. Navigate to the
new screen, then add the shortcut.
Adding a shortcut from the Apps Menu
1. Press
to activate the main Home screen.
5. Press and hold a shortcut from the available list and
position it on the current screen.
Deleting a shortcut
1. Press
to activate the main Home screen.
2. Navigate to the desired Home Page.
2. Touch and hold the desired shortcut. This unlocks it
from its location on the current screen.
3. Tap
3. Drag the icon over the Remove icon
to display your current applications.
4. Scroll through the list and locate your desired
application.
41
Fo
5. Touch and hold the application icon. This creates an
immediate shortcut of the selected icon and closes the
Apps tab.
and release it.
As you place the shortcut into the Trash, both items
turn red.
Note: This action does not delete the shortcut, it just removes
it from the current screen.
3. Scroll through the App menu to find the shortcut you
want to add as the new primary short cut.
4. Touch and hold the new shortcut, then drag it to the
empty space in the row of primary shortcuts.
The new primary shortcut will now appear on all Home
screens.
Adding and Removing Widgets
5. Tap the Widgets tab at the top of the screen.
6. Press and hold an available Widget to position it on the
current screen, then release the Widget.
Removing a Widget
1. Touch and hold a Widget until you can move it around
on the screen.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
2. Touch and hold the primary shortcut you want to
replace, then drag it to an empty space on any Home
screen.
4. Tap Apps and widgets.
You can change any of your primary shortcuts with the
shortcut.
exception of the Apps
1. Press
to activate the main Home screen.
3. Touch and hold on an empty area of the screen.
nl
Adding and Removing Primary Shortcuts
Fo
Widgets are self-contained applications that reside in either
your Widgets tab or on the main or extended Home screens.
Unlike a shortcut, the Widget appears as an on-screen
application.
Adding a Widget
1. Press
to activate the main Home screen.
2. Navigate to the desired Home Page.
2. Drag the Widget up to the Remove icon
release it.
and
As you place the Widget into the Trash, both items turn
red.
Note: This action does not actually delete the Widget, it just
removes it from the current Home screen.
Moving Icons in the Apps Menu
1. Press
2. Tap
to activate the main Home screen.
to display your current applications.
3. Tap the Apps tab at the top of the screen if it is not
already selected.
Understanding Your Phone
42
and tap View type.
and tap Edit.
7. Scroll through the list and locate the icon you wish to
move.
9. Tap Save.
to return to the Home screen.
Creating Application Folders
You can create application folders to hold similar applications
if you wish.
To create a folder follow these steps:
1. Press
to activate the main Home screen.
2. Tap
to display your current applications.
3. Tap the Apps tab at the top of the screen if it is not
already selected.
43
and tap Edit.
Fo
4. Press
icon.
A folder is displayed in the original place of the
application icon with the application icon displayed on
top of it. You can now drag other Apps into the folder.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
8. Touch and drag the icon to the position that you want.
To move to a different page, drag the icon to the edge
of the page until the page scrolls to the desired page.
10. Press
6. Drag the icon down to the Create folder
7. Enter a folder name and tap OK.
6. Press
5. Touch and hold the first application that you would like
to move to a folder.
nl
4. Press
5. Tap Customizable grid. A green circle will appear next
to the option.
8. To view information on an App, drag the App icon up to
the App info
icon to view information on the
application.
9. Tap Save.
Adding a New Page to the Application Menu
You can add a new page to your application menu by
following these steps:
1. Press
to activate the main Home screen.
2. Tap
to display your current applications.
3. Tap the Apps tab at the top of the screen if it is not
already selected.
4. Press
and tap Edit.
5. Touch and hold the first application that you would like
to move to a new page.
The app will appear on a new page.
Changing the Wallpaper
The Home screen window is displayed.
2. Tap Set wallpaper.
You can add and delete Home screens. You can have up to
seven Home screens.
To add a new Home screen:
1. Press
to activate the main Home screen.
2. Press
and tap Edit page.
3. Tap the Home screen that contains
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
You can change the Wallpaper (background) of your home
screens by following these steps:
1. From any Home screen, touch and hold on an empty
area of the screen.
Adding and Deleting Home Screens
icon.
nl
6. Drag the icon down to the Create page
7. Tap Save.
A new screen is added.
4. If desired, touch and hold the new screen and drag it to
a different location.
3. Select the location where you would like to change the
wallpaper. Tap Home screen, Lock screen, or Home and
lock screens.
4. Tap one of the following options:
• Gallery: select a wallpaper from photographs you have taken
with your camera.
• Live wallpapers: select an animated wallpaper. This option is
not available for the Lock screen option.
• Wallpapers: select from many still-life wallpapers.
Fo
5. Select a wallpaper and tap Set wallpaper, Done, or
Cancel.
Understanding Your Phone
44
to return to the main Home screen.
You can now add items to your new Home screen.
2. Press
to return to the main Home screen.
Moving Home Screens
You can arrange your Home screens in any order that you
want.
To delete a Home screen:
1. Press
to activate the main Home screen.
7. Press
and tap Edit page.
3. Touch and hold the Home screen you want to delete.
To move a Home screen, follow these steps:
1. Press
to activate the main Home screen.
nl
5. Press
and tap Edit page.
2. Press
5. If there are items on the Home screen, the Remove
home screen page prompt is displayed.
4. Drag it to the location that you would like to place it.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
4. Drag it to the trash can located at the top of the screen.
The page will turn red.
45
Fo
6. Tap OK to delete the page and its contents, otherwise
tap Cancel.
3. Touch and hold the Home screen you want to move.
In this example, the top right screen is moved to the
middle left position.
Notification Bar
The Notification Bar includes a pull-down list to show
information about processes that are running, recent
notifications, and alerts. To display the Status indicator:
On the Home screen, touch and hold the Notification
Bar until the pull-down displays, then drag down
vertically.
to return to the main Home screen.
Fo
5. Press
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
nl
䡲
When you move a Home screen, the other Home
screens are re-ordered automatically.
Understanding Your Phone
46
Accessing Additional Panel Functions
In addition to notifications, the Notification panel also
provides quick and ready access to separate device
functions. These can be quickly activated or deactivated by
toggling them on or off. You can choose the functions that
will be displayed.
1. From the notification panel, tap
to display
additional options.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
nl
To clear all notifications from the Notification panel:
1. From the Home screen, touch and hold the Notification
Bar until the pull-down displays, then drag down
vertically.
Clearing Notifications
Clear Button
2. Tap the Clear button.
47
Fo
The notifications are cleared and the panel closes.
2. Tap
then locate the Notifications panel area
located at the bottom of the Notifications panel screen.
3. In a single motion, touch and hold a desired function
then drag it to the top row.
4. Tap Brightness adjustment to create a checkmark if you
want to be able to adjust the screen brightness via the
Notification panel.
5. Tap
and then tap
functions.
Memory Card
between SD-compatible devices. This section addresses the
features and options of your device’s SD functionality. The
device has a USB SD card mode.
Mounting the SD Card
nl
To store additional photos, music, videos, and other
applications, you must mount (install) the SD card prior to
use. Mounting the SD card establishes a USB connection
with your computer.
1. Insert the SD card into the external, SD card slot. For
more information, refer to “Removing and Installing the
Memory Card” on page 8.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
The following functions (default) can either be
activated (green) or deactivated (gray): Wi-Fi, GPS,
Sound, Screen rotation, Bluetooth, Mobile data,
Blocking mode, Power saving, Screen Mirroring, Multi
window, S Beam, NFC, Air view, Air gesture, Driving
mode, Smart stay, Smart scroll, Sync, and Airplane
mode.
to display only your primary
Fo
Your device lets you use a microSD (SD) or microSDHC
card to expand available memory space. This secure digital
card enables you to exchange images, music, and data
2. Your SD card is scanned to see the available
information on it.
Unmounting the SD card
Unmounting the SD card prevents corruption and damage to
the SD card while removing it from the slot.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
More ➔ Storage.
2. Scroll to the bottom of the display and tap Unmount SD
card.
3. Tap OK.
Understanding Your Phone
48
For more information, refer to “Removing and Installing
the Memory Card” on page 8.
Warning! Performing the next step erases all data stored on
the SD card.
SD card Available Memory Status
Erasing Files from the SD card
You can erase files from the SD card using the phone.
1. Ensure the SD card is mounted. For more information,
refer to “Mounting the SD Card” on page 48.
1. From the Home screen, tap
More ➔ Storage.
2. Tap Format SD card.
➔ Settings ➔
Fo
3. At the Format SD card confirmation prompt, tap Format
SD card.
49
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
2. The available memory for Device and SD card displays
under the Total space and Available space headings.
4. Tap Delete all to format or press
nl
To view the memory allocation for your external SD card:
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
More ➔ Storage.
to cancel.
Section 3: Call Functions
Tap
➔ Settings ➔
More ➔ About device ➔
Status. Your phone number is displayed in the My
phone number field.
Making a Call
3. Tap
to make the call.
Manual Pause Dialing
1. From the Home screen, tap
and use the on-screen
keypad to enter the number you wish to dial.
2. Tap
2. Use the on-screen keypad to enter the country code,
area code, and phone number.
• If you make a mistake, tap
until the desired numbers
have been deleted.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
䡲
1. From the Home screen, tap
, then touch and hold
0 + . The + character appears.
For more information, refer to “Call Settings” on page 133.
Displaying Your Phone Number
Making an International Call
nl
This section describes how to make or answer a call. It also
includes the features and functionality associated with
making or answering a call.
to make the call.
Fo
Note: When you activate the Auto redial option in the Voice Call
menu, the phone will automatically redial up to 10 times
when the person does not answer the call or is already
on the phone. For more information, refer to “Call
Settings” on page 61.
To manually call a number with pause(s) without storing it in
your Contacts list:
and use the on-screen
1. From the Home screen, tap
keypad to enter the phone number.
2. Press
to display the dialer sub-menu.
3. Tap Add 3-sec pause to add a three second pause, and
use the keypad to enter the additional numbers.
Tip: You can create pauses longer than three seconds by
entering multiple three second pauses.
Call Functions
50
4. Select Add wait to add a wait. A wait will pause the
calling sequence until you enter a number or press a
key.
to make the call.
Use the following steps to correct a mis-typed entry when
dialing.
After entering a number using the keypad:
• If you make a mistake, tap
to erase a single character.
• Press and hold
to erase the entire string of numbers.
Ending a Call
䡲
Tap the
key.
Dialing a Recent Number
All incoming, outgoing and missed calls are recorded in the
Call log. If the number or caller is listed in your Address
Book, the associated name is also displayed.
1. From the Home screen, tap
51
tab.
Fo
2. Tap the Logs
If you do not have a SIM card installed the first time you turn
on the phone, the Insert SIM card to make calls message
displays and an animated tutorial shows you how to install
the SIM card.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
Correcting an Entered Number
Making Emergency Calls
For more information, refer to “Adding Pauses to Contact
Numbers” on page 70.
䡲
3. Tap the desired Contact to enter the Details page, then
tap
to make a call.
nl
5. Tap
A list of recent calls is displayed.
Without a SIM card, you can only make an emergency call
with the phone; normal cell phone service is not available.
Making an Emergency Call without a SIM card
1. Tap Emergency call from the on-screen display to make
an emergency call.
2. Enter 9-1-1 and tap
. Complete your call. During
this type of call, you will have access to the Speaker
mode, Keypad, and End Call features.
3. Tap
to exit this calling mode.
3. Complete your call. During this type of call, you will
have access to the Speaker mode, Keypad, and End
Call features.
Note: This mode can drain your battery power more rapidly
than normal calling mode.
Making a Call Using Speed Dial
You can assign a short cut number to a phone number in your
Contacts List for speed dialing.
to display
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts
your Contacts List.
to display the Contacts List sub-menu.
3. Tap Speed dial setting.
Fo
2. Press
5. Tap an unused number and the Select contact screen
displays.
6. Tap a contact to assign to the number. The selected
contact number will display in the speed dial number
box.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
2. Enter the emergency number (example: 911) and then
tap
4. The Speed dial setting screen displays showing the
numbers 1 through 100. The number 1 is reserved for
Voicemail.
The Emergency calling mode makes redialing an emergency
number a 1-tap process. Before you can resume normal
calling operations, you should first exit this mode.
1. From the Home screen, tap
nl
Making an Emergency Call with a SIM card
7. To remove a speed dial number or change the order,
press
to display the Speed dial setting sub-menu.
8. Tap Change order or Remove.
➔ Keypad
9. To make a call using Speed Dial, tap
and from the Dialer, touch and hold the speed dial
number. If the speed dial number is more than 1 digit
long, enter the first digits, then hold the last digit.
Making a Call from the Address Book
You can store phone numbers that you use regularly on the
SIM card or in the phone’s memory. These entries are
collectively called the Address Book.
For further details about the Address Book feature, see
“Finding an Address Book Entry” on page 71.
Call Functions
52
Answering a Call
nl
When a call is received the phone rings and displays the
caller’s phone number, or name if stored in the Address
Book.
1. At the incoming call screen:
• Touch and drag
in any direction to answer the call.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
• Touch and drag
in any direction to reject the call and
send it to your voicemail.
• Touch and drag the Reject call with message tab upward and
tap a predefined text message to send to the caller.
– I’m driving
– I’m at the cinema
– I’m in class
– I’m in a meeting
– Sorry, I’m busy. Call back later.
– or –
53
Fo
– Tap Create new message to compose a new message.
2. Tap
to end the call.
Note: You can answer a call while using the Address Book or
other menu feature. After ending the call, the phone
returns to the previously active function screen.
• Logs: displays a list of all dialed, received, and missed calls.
• Favorites: displays your contacts that you have marked as
Favorites.
• Contacts: takes you to your Address Book where you can select a
contact to call.
After you begin to enter numbers, the Add to Contacts option
appears so you can save the Contact if needed.
Call Log
tab.
Fo
The phone stores the numbers of the calls you’ve dialed,
received, or missed in the Call log. The Call log displays the
details of the call.
1. From the Home screen, tap
2. Tap the Logs
All calls made, received, and missed are listed. Types of calls
are identified by the following icons:
• Incoming Calls:
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
From the Home screen and Application menus, you have the
option to access the Dialer and initiate a call by tapping
➔ Keypad. From the Dialer and the Contacts screen, the
following tabs are located at the top of your screen:
• Keypad: dials the current number entered using the on-screen
keypad.
A list of recent calls is displayed. If the number or caller
is listed in your Address Book, the associated name is
displayed.
nl
Dialing Options
• Outgoing Calls:
• Missed Calls:
• Rejected Calls:
• Auto Rejected Calls:
Calling Back a Missed Call
To call back a missed call number:
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Logs
A list of recent calls is displayed. If the number or caller
is listed in your Address Book, the associated name is
displayed.
Call Functions
54
2. Swipe the desired missed call to the right to call.
– or –
Add as new
contact
Update an existing
contact
Swipe the desired missed call to the left to message.
➔ Logs
Call the number
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
A list of recent calls is displayed.
Send a message
nl
1. From the Home screen, tap
Saving a Recent Call to your Address Book
2. Tap the call you want to save to your Address Book.
3. The call detail page is displayed. Tap Create contact to
add the call to your Address Book.
The Create contact screen is displayed.
– or –
If you want to replace the number for an existing
contact, tap Update existing.
4. Enter information into the various fields using the
keypad.
5. Tap Save to save when you are finished.
For further details about the Address Book feature, see
“Adding a New Contact” on page 69.
Sending a Message to a Recent Call
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Logs
55
Fo
A list of recent calls is displayed.
2. Swipe the entry you want to message to the left.
to
For more information, refer to “Creating and Sending
Messages” on page 103.
Deleting a Call from the Call Log
➔ Logs
A list of recent calls is displayed.
4. At the Delete log prompt, tap Delete.
Adding a Call to the Reject List
➔ Logs
A list of recent calls is displayed.
➔ Logs
➔ Call duration.
3. The following times are displayed for Voice and Data:
• Last call: shows the length of time for the last call.
• Dialed calls: shows the total length of time for all calls made.
• Received calls: shows the total length of time for all calls
received.
• All calls: shows the total length of time for all calls made and
received.
The call is deleted from the Call log.
1. From the Home screen, tap
1. From the Home screen, tap
2. Press
2. Touch and hold the call you want to delete from the Call
log.
3. Tap Delete.
Call Duration
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
1. From the Home screen, tap
Future calls from this number will be rejected and sent
to your voicemail.
4. When you are done with your message, tap
send.
3. Tap Add to reject list.
4. At the Add to reject list prompt, tap OK.
nl
3. At the Message screen, tap the empty text field and
use the on-screen keypad to type in a message.
4. You may reset these times to zero by pressing
then tapping Reset.
Fo
2. Touch and hold the call you want to add to the Reject
List.
Call Functions
56
Options During a Call
Your phone provides a number of control functions that you
can use during a call.
Quickly add more volume to the incoming audio by
tapping the on-screen Extra volume button
From the Home screen, you can also adjust the ringer volume
using these same keys.
During an active call there are several functions available by
tapping a corresponding on-screen button.
• Hold: place the current active call on hold.
Fo
• Add call: displays the dialer so you can call another person.
• Keypad: displays the on-screen keypad, where you can
enter number using DTMF (Dual Tone Multi-Frequency).
57
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
Press the Up volume key to increase the volume level
and press the Down volume key to decrease the
volume level.
– or –
adjust the speaker volume using the volume keys.) A green line
will appear under the Speaker button.
– Tap Speaker again to use the phone’s earpiece (see “Using
the Speakerphone During an Active Call” on page 60). The
green line will disappear when Speaker is not activated.
• Mute/Unmute turn the onboard microphone either on or off.
– Tap Mute during a call to mute the microphone. A green line
will appear under the Mute button.
– Tap Mute again to unmute the microphone. The green line will
disappear when Mute is not activated.
• Headset connects to a Bluetooth headset.
– Tap Headset during a call to activate a Bluetooth headset. A
green line will appear under the Headset button.
– Tap Headset again to de-activate the Bluetooth headset. The
green line will disappear when the Headset is not activated.
• Press
for more options:
– Contacts: allows you to go to your Contact list.
– Memo: allows you to write a memo.
– Message: allows you to write a message during a call.
nl
During a call, to adjust the volume, use the Volume keys on
the left side of the phone.
In-Call Options
through the earpiece.
– Tap Speaker to route the audio through the speaker. (You can
Adjusting the Call Volume
䡲
• End call: terminates the call.
• Speaker: routes the phone’s audio through either the speaker or
2. Confirm the option is enabled
Activating Noise Reduction
During a call it may be necessary to activate the noise
reduction feature. Activating this feature can improve the
quality of your conversation by reducing ambient noise.
Noise reduction in on by default.
1. Press
to turn Noise reduction off.
2. Press
to turn Noise reduction on.
Placing a Call on Hold
2. Tap Add call
to display the dialer.
3. Enter the new number and tap
Once connected, the active call will appear in a large
box at the top of your screen and the call on hold will
appear in a smaller box in the middle of your screen.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
3. Select an available option. Choose from: Adapt Sound,
Soft sound, Clear sound, and Off.
To make a new call while you have a call in progress
Hold .
1. Tap Hold
During a call it may be necessary to adjust the sound of the
incoming call by selecting an audio equalizer setting for the
current call.
1. From the call screen, tap
2. You can later reactivate this call by tapping Unhold
Unhold .
nl
Personalizing the Call Sound Setting
Fo
You can place the current call on hold at any point during a
conversation. You can also make another call while you have
a call in progress if your network supports this service.
Hold . This action places
1. While on a call, tap Hold
the current caller on hold.
Switching Between Calls
When you have an active call and a call on hold, you may
switch between the two calls, changing the one on hold to
active and placing the other on hold.
1. Tap Swap.
The current call (caller #2) is placed on hold and the
previous call on hold (caller #1) is then reactivated so
that you can continue conversing with that person. The
active call will appear in a green box.
2. Tap
to end the currently active call.
Call Functions
58
to end the specific call.
3. Tap
to end the remaining call.
To answer a call while you have a call in progress
3-Way Calling (Multi-Party Calling)
The 3-Way or Multi-Party feature allows you to answer a
series of incoming calls and place them on hold. If this
service is supported by the network, all calls can be joined
together. You are notified of an incoming call by a call waiting
tone.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
You can answer another call while you have a call in progress
if you have activated your Call waiting feature. Otherwise, the
other call will go to your Voicemail box. For more information,
refer to “Additional settings” on page 135.
1. Tap
and slide to the right to answer another call.
2. The call on hold will now become the active call. Tap
to end the call.
2. Tap
To end a call on hold
1. Tap
to disconnect the active call.
nl
To end a specific call
1. Tap Swap until the call you want to end appears in a
green box.
2. Tap Putting "Name/Number" on hold to put the first call
on hold.
– or –
Tap Ending call with "Name/Number" to end the first
call.
59
Fo
3. To switch between the two calls, tap Swap.
• Swap: Places the current call on hold and then activates the
previous call. The active call will appear in a green box. Tap
Swap again to switch back.
Note: The Merge option combines all of the calls you have
established with your phone (both active and on hold).
Swap places the current call on hold and then activates
the previous call.
This feature joins all of the calls you have established with
your phone (both active and on hold) into a multi-party call.
1. Tap
and slide to the right to answer the call.
2. Tap
and slide to the right to answer the next call.
3. Tap Putting "Name/Number" on hold to put the first call
on hold.
4. Join the first two callers into a single multi-party call by
tapping Merge
Merge
6. Tap
to end the call.
nl
Unhold
Using the Speakerphone During an Active Call
While in an active call, it is possible to enable the
speakerphone feature.
1. Tap Speaker
Speaker
Example: You wish to say something to person in the room,
but do not want the person on the phone to hear
you.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
To rejoin the conference call tap Unhold
You can temporarily switch your phone’s microphone off, so
that the other person cannot hear you.
5. To temporarily leave the conference call, tap Hold
Hold .
Switching off the Microphone (Mute)
The Speaker button now appears as
speakerphone is activated.
Speaker
Mute
and Mute is
Mute
2. Use the Volume keys (located on the left side of your
phone) to adjust the volume.
Speaker
Important! For more information, refer to “Responsible
Listening” on page 223.
Fo
Mute
The Mute button now appears as
activated.
to deactivate the Mute function and
2. Tap Mute
reactivate the microphone.
and the
3. To deactivate the speakerphone, tap Speaker
To mute your phone during a call
1. Tap Mute
Bluetooth headset
1. Tap Headset
Headset
2. The phone will scan for your Bluetooth headset. When
found, connect to the headset.
The Headset button now appears as
Bluetooth headset is activated.
Headset
and the
3. Tap Headset
to deactivate the Bluetooth headset
and reactivate the phone speaker.
Call Functions
60
Headset
Searching for a Number in Address Book
1. During the active call, press
• Forward when busy allows you to forward voice calls to a
designated number instead of your voice mail number if you
are on another phone call.
then tap Contacts.
2. Tap the Address Book entry.
• Forward when unanswered: allows you to forward voice calls
to a designated number instead of your voicemail number
when there is no answer on your phone. You can also select
the amount of time that the phone delays before forwarding.
nl
For further details about the Address Book feature, see
“Finding an Address Book Entry” on page 71.
Call waiting
䡲
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
The Call Waiting feature allows you to answer an incoming
call while you have a call in progress, if this service is
supported by the network, and you must first activate the
Call Waiting feature:
From the Home screen, tap
➔
➔ Additional settings ➔Call waiting.
➔ Call settings
You are notified of an incoming call by a call waiting
tone.
Call forwarding
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔
➔ Call settings
➔ Additional settings ➔ Call forwarding.
Fo
2. Tap one of the following options:
• Always forward: allows you to forward all voice calls.
61
• Forward when unreachable: allows you to forward voice calls
to a designated number instead of your voicemail number
when you are not in an area covered by your service provider or
when your phone is switched off.
Call Settings
To access the Call settings menu:
䡲
From the Home screen, tap
settings.
– or –
➔
䡲
From the Home screen, tap
My device ➔ Call.
➔ Settings ➔
➔ Call
My device
For detailed information on all of the call settings, see “Call
Settings” on page 133.
Section 4: Entering Text
Your phone comes equipped with an orientation detector that
can tell if the phone is being held in an upright (Portrait) or
sideways (Landscape) orientation. This is useful when
entering text.
Text Input Methods
Entering Text Using the Samsung
Keyboard
nl
From a screen where you can enter text, rotate your phone
counterclockwise to a Landscape orientation. The on-screen
QWERTY keypad will display.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
This section describes how to select the desired text input
method when entering characters into your phone. This
section also describes the predictive text entry system that
reduces the amount of key strokes associated with entering
text.
There are three text input methods available:
• Google Voice typing: allows you to enter text by speaking.
• Samsung keyboard (default): Samsung’s on-screen
QWERTY keypad that can be used in both portrait and
landscape orientation.
• Swype: a new way to enter text on touch screens. Instead
of tapping each key, use your finger to trace over each
letter of a word.
Shift
Key
Delete
Key
Voice Typing
and More Options Space Bar
New
Paragraph
Text Input Mode
Fo
To change the input method, see “Keyboards and Input
Methods” on page 142.
Entering Text
62
Changing the Text Input Mode - Keypad
There are two main keypad layout keys that will change the
on-screen keys within the QWERTY keypad.
nl
The available Text Input modes are: Sym and Abc.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
Symbol/Numeric Mode: activates the number,
symbol, and emoticon keys.
ABC Mode: activates the default alphabet keys.
Can also be set to Abc or abc by using the shift
) key.
Note: When in Abc mode, the Sym button will appear. When in
Sym mode, the Abc/ABC/abc button will appear.
Using ABC Mode
1. If desired, rotate your phone counterclockwise to a
Landscape orientation.
63
Fo
2. When you tap the Enter message field, the following
screen displays:
3. Tap the desired alphabetic characters.
4. The screen initially opens in ABC mode. After typing the
first letter, the shift key (
) will change to
and following letters will be lowercase.
5. Tap
to input another upper-case letter or tap
twice to switch to ABC mode. The shift key will
change to
in ABC mode. All following letters will
be uppercase until you tap the shift key again.
By using the Predictive Text option, you can have next-letter
prediction and regional error correction, which compensates
for pressing the wrong keys on the QWERTY keyboard.
Predictive text is turned on by default.
on the keyboard, then tap
1. Press and hold
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
2. Tap
at the bottom of the screen. The following
screen displays:
Predictive Text
Use Symbol/Numeric Mode to add numbers, symbols, or
emoticons.
1. Rotate your phone counterclockwise to a Landscape
orientation.
nl
Using Symbol/Numeric Mode
2. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the
Predictive text field, to
3. In the text portion of the message screen, begin typing
a word. A list of word options is displayed. Tap one of
the words to replace the word that has already been
typed or scroll the line of words to the left for more
word choices.
3. Tap the desired number, symbol, or emoticon
characters.
button to access additional symbols.
to return to Abc mode.
Fo
4. Tap the
5. Tap
Entering Text
64
Entering Text Using Handwriting
You can enter text simply by using your finger to handwrite
letters on your screen.
on the keyboard, then tap
1. Press and hold
Samsung Keyboard Settings
For information on how you can configure your Samsung
keyboard settings, see “Samsung Keyboard settings” on
page 143.
Using the Google Voice Typing Feature
2. Use your finger tip to write out each character. You can
print or use cursive.
Fo
3. You can write out your entire message using the
Handwriting feature or tap
to switch back to
Samsung keyboard mode.
65
nl
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
Note: You can also use Predictive Text mode in the portrait
orientation.
4. Continue typing your message. Tap
to send the
message or press
for more options. For more
information, refer to “Creating and Sending Messages”
on page 103.
You can use your voice to enter text using the Google Voice
typing feature.
on the keyboard.
1. Tap
Entering Text Using Swype
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
nl
Swype™ is a text input method that allows you to enter a
word by sliding your finger or stylus from letter to letter,
lifting your finger between words. Swype uses error
correcting algorithms and a language model to predict the
next word. Swype also includes a tapping predictive text
system.
2. At the Speak now prompt, speak clearly and distinctly
into the microphone.
The following example shows how to enter the word “This”.
Put your finger down on the “T”, and without lifting, glide it
to the “h”, then to the “i” then over to the “s”.
3. If the red microphone turns gray, then the feature has
timed out and you should tap the microphone icon to
start again.
The text is displayed in the message as you are
speaking.
4. After you have quit speaking for several seconds, tap
to return to the keyboard.
Fo
Note: The feature works best when you break your message
down into smaller segments.
Entering Text
66
• Move your finger or stylus over the apostrophe to enter
contractions.
The Samsung keyboard is the default text input method, so
to use Swype, you must first change the default keyboard
setting.
• Double-tap on the word you want to change to correct a
To enable Swype:
1. From a screen where you can enter text, touch and
drag
down from the Notifications area then tap
Select input method.
nl
Enabling and Configuring Swype
The Swype keyboard is displayed.
For information on how you can configure your Swype
settings, see “Swype Keypad Settings” on page 144.
Swype Text Entry Tips
You can access the SwypeTips application and watch a video
or tutorial on using Swype. You can also use the following
Swype text entry tips.
• Create a squiggle (like an S shape) to create a double letter (such
as pp in apple).
67
Fo
• Touch and hold a key to view the punctuation menu then make a
selection.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
2. Tap the Swype radio button. It will turn green.
Swype Settings
misspelled word, then tap the delete key to erase one character.
Touch and hold the delete key to erase an entire word.
Section 5: Contacts and Your Address Book
To activate the AT&T Address Book:
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts
Your Address Book is displayed.
If you ever upgrade, damage, or lose your phone, you can
easily restore your contacts onto your new phone by
following these steps:
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
When you access the AT&T Address Book, the network
backup service, contacts are automatically synchronized
between your phone and online address book. The changes
you make are automatically saved and if you ever upgrade,
damage, or lose your phone, you can easily restore your
contacts onto your new phone.
Synchronizing your AT&T Address Book
AT&T Address Book Activation
You can also manage your Address Book on the web
at http://www.att.com/addressbook.
nl
This section allows you to manage your daily contacts by
storing their name and number in your Address Book.
Address Book entries can be sorted by name, entry, or group.
2. If you have not synchronized your phone with your
online AT&T Address Book recently, the AT&T Address
Book screen is displayed. Tap Start Sync if you want to
synchronize your Address Book.
Fo
3. Follow the on-screen instructions.
Your AT&T Address Book is Ready to Use. You can now make
a call or send a message through your Address Book.
2. Press
➔ Settings ➔ AT&T Address Book.
3. At the AT&T Address Book screen, tap Yes to
synchronize your phone with your online Address Book.
4. If there are existing contacts on your phone, you will be
prompted if you would like to remove them first. Tap
Yes or No.
Note: You must first copy any contacts that exist on your SIM
card to your phone. For more information, refer to
“Copying Contacts to the Phone” on page 79.
Your phone is synchronized.
Contacts and Your Address Book
68
5. At the Your AT&T Address Book is Ready for Use prompt,
tap OK.
• Remove: although not an option with a new entry, deletes any
previously assigned image on an existing contact.
4. Tap the Name field and use the on-screen keypad to
enter the full name. For more information, refer to
“Entering Text” on page 62.
– or –
Your Contact list is displayed.
Adding a New Contact
nl
Use the following procedure to add a new contact to your
Address Book.
Tap
next to the Name field to display additional
name fields.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
Saving a Number from the Home screen
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts
➔
2. At the Save contact to prompt, tap on Device, SIM, or
Account name.
3. Tap the image icon and assign a picture to the new
entry by choosing one of three options:
• Image: retrieve a previously stored image from your Gallery or
from your My files folder and assign it to this entry. Tap an
image to assign the image to the contact, then tap Done.
• Pictures by people: retrieve a previously shared image from
your Gallery.
• Take picture: use the camera to take a new picture and assign
it to this entry, then tap Done.
69
Fo
• S Memo: use an image from one of your S Memos.
5. Tap the Phone number field.
The numerical keypad is displayed.
The Mobile button Mobile initially displays next to the
Phone number field. If you want to add a phone number
that is not a mobile number, tap the Mobile button and
select from Mobile, Home, Work, Work fax, Home Fax,
Pager, Other, Custom (add your own label), or Callback.
6. Enter the phone number.
Tap
to add another Phone number field or tap
to delete a field.
7. Tap any of the following fields that you want to add to
your new contact:
• Message alert: allows you to set the ringtone for your
message alerts.
to edit.
3. Tap the phone number field.
4. Tap the screen at the position where the pause or wait
needs to be added.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
• Vibration pattern: allows you to set the specific type of
vibration.
2. Tap
• Ringtone: adds a field used to assign a message tone that will
sound when messages are received from this contact.
To add a pause or a wait to an existing Contact:
, and then tap
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts
the name or number to open the Contact.
nl
• Groups: assign the contact to Not assigned, ICE - emergency
contacts, Co-workers, Family, or Friends.
• Add another field: tap this button to add another field such as
Phonetic name, Organization, Email, IM, Address, Notes,
Nickname, Website, Internet call, Events, or Relationship.
8. Tap Save to save the new contact.
Adding Pauses to Contact Numbers
Fo
When you call automated systems, you are often required to
enter a password or account number. Instead of manually
entering the numbers each time, you can store the numbers
in your Contacts along with special characters called pauses
and waits. A pause will stop the calling sequence for two
seconds and a wait will pause the calling sequence until you
enter a number or press a key.
5. Tap
6. Tap Pause to add a two-second pause or tap Wait to
add a wait, and use the keypad to enter the additional
numbers. A pause will be displayed as a comma (,) and
a wait will be displayed as a semi-colon (;).
7. Tap Save to save your changes, or tap Cancel to
discard.
Editing an Existing Contact
When editing an existing contact, you can tap a field and
change or delete the information, or you can add additional
fields to the contact’s list of information.
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts
2. Press and hold the Contact that you want to edit.
3. Tap Edit.
Contacts and Your Address Book
70
4. Tap any of the fields to add, change, or delete
information.
5. Tap Save to save the edited information.
Using Contacts
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
Once you have stored phone numbers in the Address Book,
you can dial them easily and quickly by either using their SIM
card location number or by using the Search field to locate
the entry.
nl
Dialing or Messaging from Address Book
From the Address book, you can also send messages.
Finding an Address Book Entry
You can store phone numbers and their corresponding
names onto your SIM card and phone’s onboard memory.
The two locations are physically separate but are used as a
single entity, called the Address Book.
Depending on your particular SIM card, the maximum
number of phone numbers the SIM card can store and how
they are stored may differ.
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts
71
Fo
2. Within the Contacts list (sorted alphabetically), tap a
letter on the right side of the display to quickly jump to
the contacts beginning with that letter.
3. Tap the contact you wish to call or message.
4. Tap the phone icon to make a phone call or tap the
message icon to send a message.
Joining Contacts
Joining Contact Information
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
nl
Many people now maintain multiple email accounts, social
networking logins, and other similar account information. For
example, a Facebook account login name might differ from a
corporate email account login because they are maintained
separately and for different groups of people.
This device can synchronize with multiple accounts such as
Facebook, Twitter, MySpace, Corporate email, and Google.
When you synchronize your phone with these accounts, each
account creates a separate contact entry in the Contacts list.
For more information, refer to “Creating and Sending
Messages” on page 103.
Tip: From the Contact list, sweep right over a listing to make a
call. Sweep left over a listing to send a message.
If one of your contacts (Amy Smith, for example) has a
regular email account that you maintain in Gmail, but also
has a Facebook account under her maiden and married
name, as well as a Yahoo! chat account, when you merge
these accounts into your Contacts list you can join all of her
entries and view the information in one record.
Fo
The next time you synchronize your phone with your
accounts, any updates that contacts make to email account
names, email addresses, etc. automatically update in your
contacts list.
Contacts and Your Address Book
72
3. Press
➔ Join contact.
The contact list is displayed.
Unjoining a Contact
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
2. Tap a contact name (the name you want to join to
another entry). Note: typically this is the same contact
with a different name or account information.
5. Tap area under the Connection bar to view the contact
information you joined. The contacts and information
displays with an icon next to the contact name to
indicate what type of account information is contained
in the entry.
nl
For more information about synchronizing accounts, see
“Synchronizing Accounts” on page 74.
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts
Note: Only contacts stored on your phone can be joined.
4. Tap the second contact entry (the entry in which to
join). The second contact is now joined with the first
and the account information is merged into one screen.
2. Tap a contact name (the account name from which you
want to unlink an entry). Note: typically this is the same
contact with a different name or account information.
3. Tap the area under the Connection bar.
4. Tap the minus sign
want to unjoin.
next to entry in which you
5. At the Separate contact prompt, tap OK.
73
Fo
Note: The information is still maintained in both entries, but
displays in one record for easier viewing when you join
the contacts.
The contact is now separated and no longer displays in
the merged record screen.
Marking a Contact as Default
Synchronizing Accounts
2. Tap a Contact name.
nl
From the Accounts menu you decide if you want applications
to synchronize, send, and receive data at any given time, or if
you want the applications to synchronize automatically. After
determining how you want the accounts to synchronize,
indicate which account to synchronize with your Contacts
list.
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
When you use messaging type applications, the application
needs to know which information is primary (default) in a
contact entry list. For example, you may have three different
contact records for John Smith, so the application will be
looking for the “default” number or entry.
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts
3. Press
➔ Mark as default. The Mark as default
screen displays radio buttons next to the contact
names or phone numbers of all the linked contacts.
The radio button next to the default contact will be
green.
4. To change the default contact, tap the radio button next
to another entry that you want to be the default. The
radio button will turn green, then tap Done.
2. Press
then tap Accounts.
If you have previously added any accounts, the Sync
settings prompt is displayed with your current accounts
listed.
3. Tap an account that you would like to synchronize.
4. At the Sync settings screen, tap the options that you
would like to synchronize for that account.
5. Tap Sync now to synchronize the account.
The account is synchronized.
Fo
6. Press
to return to the Contacts list.
Contacts and Your Address Book
74
Note: You can also synchronize your accounts using the
Settings menu. For more information, refer to
“Synchronizing Accounts” on page 151.
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts
then press
2. The following options are displayed:
• Delete: allows you to delete 1 or more of your contacts.
• SIM Management: allows you to copy contacts from your
phone to your SIM card or from your SIM card to your phone.
You can also delete contacts from your SIM.
Fo
• Import/Export: allows you to move contacts to or from your
memory card or USB storage. You can also send a namecard
via Bluetooth, ChatON, Email, Gmail, Messaging, or Wi-Fi
Direct.
75
nl
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
You can access Address Book options while at the main
Address Book page or while in the details page for a specific
entry.
Options in Address Book
• Speed dial setting: allows you to set up speed-dialing. For
more information, refer to “Making a Call Using Speed
Dial” on page 52.
Address Book Options
• Accounts: allows you to add and manage your Samsung,
ChatON, Google, LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol),
and Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync accounts. Tap Add account
and then follow the on-screen instructions.
• Send message/email: allows you to send a text or message.
• Contacts to display: You can choose to display all of your
contacts or only display contacts on your Phone, SIM, or
contacts stored to other accounts. You can also tap Customized
list to change other options on how your contacts are displayed.
• Settings: allows you to choose set the following options:
– Only contacts with phones: allows you to only display
contacts that have phone numbers.
– List by: allows you to sort by First name or Last name.
– Display contacts by: allows you to sort by First name or Last
name first.
– Service numbers: allows you to display or edit your service
numbers.
– AT&T Address Book: allows you to access the AT&T Address
Book so you can sync your contacts.
• Help: provides additional information on using your contacts.
Options at Selected Contact Screen
2. Tap a contact and at the contact’s display screen, press
• Assign speed dial: allows you to assign this contact to your
speed dial list. For more information, refer to “Making a Call
Using Speed Dial” on page 52.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts
• Mark as default: when you have multiple contacts linked
together, you can mark one of them as default (only displays
when contact is saved to the phone). For more information,
refer to “Marking a Contact as Default” on page 74.
contacts via Bluetooth in the form of namecards.
nl
– Contact sharing settings: allows you to send all or individual
3. The following options are displayed:
• History: allows you to view the phone and message history for
the contact.
• Edit: allows you to edit the contact’s information.
• Delete: allows you to delete the contact from your Address
Book.
• Join contact: allows you to join contacts with other contacts
(only displays when contact is saved to SIM).
• Share namecard via: allows you to send the contact’s
information via Bluetooth, ChatON, Email, Gmail, Messaging, or
Wi-Fi Direct.
• Add to/Remove from reject list: allows you to add or remove
the contact from your reject list. If they call while being on the
reject list, the call will be sent directly to voice mail.
• Print contact info: allows you to print the contact’s namecard
to a Samsung printer using Wi-Fi.
• Add shortcut to home: allows you to place a shortcut for this
contact on your Home screen.
Fo
• Separate contact: allows you to separate contacts that have
been joined. This option only appears if the contact has been
joined.
Contacts and Your Address Book
76
Creating a New Group
Groups
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts
➔
➔ Create.
Adding a Contact to a Group
3. Tap Add to group.
5. Tap Save.
3. Tap Group ringtone to choose a ringtone for assignment
to this new group. Tap a ringtone to hear how it
sounds, then tap OK.
– or –
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
4. Tap a group entry.
The contact is added to the group.
Removing a Contact From a Group
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts
Groups
Groups
2. Tap a group entry.
3. Press
➔ Remove member.
Tap Add to select a ringtone from your music files.
➔
4. Tap all of the contacts you want to remove from this
group. A green checkmark will appear next to their
name.
5. Tap Done.
Fo
The contacts are now removed from the group.
77
2. Tap the Group name field and use the on-screen
keypad to enter a new group name. For more
information, refer to “Entering Text” on page 62.
nl
2. Press and hold a contact that you would like to add to a
group.
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts
➔ Groups
Groups
4. Tap Message alert to choose an alert tone for
assignment to this new group, then tap OK.
5. Tap Vibration pattern to choose a vibration audio file for
assignment to this new group, then tap OK.
– or –
Tap Create and follow the on-screen instructions to
create your own vibration pattern.
6. Tap Add member to add contacts to the new group.
7. Tap each contact you want to add to create a
checkmark. You can also tap Select all.
8. Tap Done.
Adding Favorites to your Address Book
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts
Groups
2. Tap a group entry.
3. Press
3. Tap Add to favorites on the displayed list.
4. A gold star will appear next to the contact in the
Address Book.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
To edit a Group entry, there must be at least one member as
part of the selected group.
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts
➔ Groups
Editing a Caller Group
2. Within the Contacts list, touch and hold a contact that
you want to add to your favorites list.
nl
9. Tap Save to save the new Group category.
Removing Favorites from your Address Book
➔ Edit.
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts
4. Make modifications to the Group name, Group ringtone,
or Vibration pattern fields.
5. Tap Add member to add more contacts to this group.
2. Within the Contacts list, touch and hold a contact that
you want to remove from your favorites list. Contacts in
your Favorites list will have a gold star.
6. Tap Done.
3. Tap Remove from favorites on the displayed list.
7. Tap Save to save the edited Group category.
Address Book Favorites
Once you have stored phone numbers in the Address Book,
you can add them to your Favorites list.
To view your Favorites list:
From the Home screen, tap Contacts
Favorites
Fo
䡲
4. The gold star will no longer appear next to the contact
in the Address Book.
Managing Address Book Contacts
You can copy, delete, and view the memory status for the
Phone and SIM contacts on your phone.
➔ Favorites
Contacts and Your Address Book
78
Copying Contacts to the Phone
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts
SIM Management.
2. Tap Copy Contacts to SIM.
➔
➔
The phone then displays a list of your current phone
contacts.
3. Tap the contacts to place a checkmark adjacent to
those entries you wish to have copied to the SIM card.
• Repeat this step for all individual entries you wish copied to the
SIM or tap Select all to place a checkmark alongside all
entries.
4. Tap Done to copy.
Fo
5. At the Copy to SIM display, tap OK.
The selected numbers are copied to the SIM card.
79
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts
SIM Management.
➔
➔
2. Tap Copy Contacts from SIM.
3. At the Create contact under account prompt, tap on
Device or an account name that you would like to copy
the contact to.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
Note: When storing an Address Book entry into the SIM card,
only the name, phone number, and email address are
available as fields. Also, if you move the SIM card to
another phone that does not support additional fields on
the SIM card, this additional information may not be
available.
nl
Copying Contacts to the SIM Card
The phone then displays a list of your current contacts
stored on your SIM card.
4. Tap the contacts to place a checkmark adjacent to
those entries you wish to have copied to your phone.
• Repeat this step for all individual entries you wish copied to
your phone or tap Select all to place a checkmark alongside all
entries.
5. Tap Done to copy.
The selected numbers are copied.
Deleting Contacts from the SIM card
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts
SIM Management.
2. Tap Delete Contacts from SIM.
➔
➔
y
You can view the list of Service Dialing Numbers (SDN)
assigned by your service provider. These numbers may
include emergency numbers, customer service numbers, and
directory inquiries.
➔
➔
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts
Settings.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
3. Tap the contacts to place a checkmark adjacent to
those entries you wish to have deleted from the SIM
card.
• Repeat this step for all individual entries you wish copied to the
SIM or tap Select all to place a checkmark alongside all
entries.
Using the Service Dialing Numbers
nl
The phone then displays a list of your current SIM
contacts.
2. Tap Service numbers.
3. Scroll through the available numbers (if available).
4. Tap Delete.
5. At the Delete Contacts from SIM prompt, tap OK.
The selected numbers are deleted from the SIM card.
Deleting Address Book Entries from the Phone
4. Tap a number and the call is made.
Note: This menu is available only when your SIM card
supports Service Dialing Numbers.
You can delete Phone or SIM entries from your phone’s
memory.
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts
2. Within the Contacts list, touch and hold a contact that
you want to delete.
3. Tap Delete on the displayed list.
Fo
4. At the Delete prompt, tap OK to delete the contact or
Cancel to exit.
Contacts and Your Address Book
80
Section 6: Multimedia
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
Samsung Hub
Important! You must be using an active Wi-Fi/4G/LTE
connection to preview and download a media file.
The internal memory acts as a storage location for
your downloaded rental or purchase.
nl
This section explains how to use the multimedia features of
your phone, including Samsung Hub, Samsung Link, AT&T
Locker, Music, Google Play Music, Video, Play Movies & TV,
Gallery, Camera, and Camcorder.
Samsung Hub makes it easy to find, sample, and purchase
movies, TV shows, books, games, and music, in one userfriendly location. With hundreds of titles available,
entertaining your family on-the-go has never been easier.
You can rent or purchase your favorite content and watch
from any location. Samsung Hub is your gateway to mobile
entertainment.
You must have an active Samsung Account to purchase and
rent content via Samsung Hub.
Note: Samsung Hub usage is based on service availability.
Important! The Samsung account manages the access
information (username/password) to several
applications, such as Samsung Link, Chat On, and
Samsung Hub.
Creating a New Samsung Hub Account
Before you can rent or buy media, you must first create an
account. Enter the required information.
1. Confirm you have already logged in to your Samsung
account.
2. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Samsung Hub
81
Fo
3. When prompted to connect via mobile networks, select
either Cancel or Connect.
Note: Your Samsung Hub account is managed by the Samsung
account application. This application manages your user
profile information.
5. Press
➔ Help for additional information.
Using Samsung Hub
2. Scroll across the screen to select from the following
available pages:
• MUSIC: displays featured Music content available for purchase/
stream from the Music store & Radio. This page also allows you
to search for new content, or navigate directly to the Music
store page by clicking on the Music link at the top of the page.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
Tip: In some cases it might be necessary to sign in to your
Samsung account via the application. Press
and then
select Sign in.
• The Overview screen (landing page) displays an main access
for all available categories and recently available content for
purchase or rental.
nl
4. If notified your Samsung account is not yet active or
verified, tap OK. You must be signed in to your
Samsung account to use the application’s various
features.
Fo
The main Samsung Hub screen provides an overview of all
the available categories on one page such as: Music, Video,
Books, and Games. The overview page also displays recently
added media that you can rent or purchase.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Samsung Hub
• VIDEO: displays featured film and TV content available for
purchase/rent from the video store. This page also allows you
to search for new content, or navigate directly to the Movie &
TV store page by clicking the Video link at the top of the page.
• BOOKS: displays featured Book content available for purchase
from the Book store. This page also allows you to search for
new content, or navigate directly to the Book store page by
clicking the Books link at the top of the page.
• GAMES: displays featured Game content available from the
Game store. This page also allows you to search for new
content, or navigate directly to the Game store page by clicking
the Games link a the top of the page.
Multimedia
82
Samsung Hub Notices
• Any media item (Media Content) may be rented or purchased after
you create an account in Samsung Hub.
• Media Content that is purchased and downloaded may be viewed
concurrently on up to five (5) devices with Samsung Hub (or “the
service”) that are also registered to the same account.
• You may remove a device from your account no more than once
every 90 days.
• You may remove Media Content from a device as many times as
Fo
you’d like. You will have the ability to re-download the Media
Content later subject to content re-download availability and
content provider permissions.
83
Content.
• Unlike purchased Media Content, rented Media Content will be
viewable on only 1 device in your account at a time.
• Media Content is downloaded and saved to your authorized
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
5. Choose a payment method, then follow the on-screen
instructions.
have acquired through the Service.
• You can use 3G, 4G, or Wi-Fi connectivity to download Media
4. Depending on the content, you can either purchase,
rent, or stream the content directly from the product
detail page.
• You may need network coverage to access Media Content you
nl
3. To purchase or view featured content in more detail,
tap on any content (Thumbnail or text) to navigate to
the product detail page.
device's SD card. No SD Card included out of box.
• Your Media Content may pause/stop or not download in networks
where there is a weak signal.
• You may begin watching downloaded Media Content as soon as a)
license acquisition has occurred and b) sufficient amount of the
Media Content has been buffered.
• You must finish watching Media Content within the time limit set
out for each piece of content (which may be as short as 24
consecutive hours).
• Stopping, pausing or restarting rented Media Content does not
extend the available viewing time.
• Unless otherwise restricted by the Content Providers, you can
download Media Content to your TV using HDMI connections;
otherwise, you cannot play Media Content downloaded from your
mobile device output.
Samsung Link
nl
Samsung Link allows users to share their in-device media
content with other external devices using DLNA certified™
(Digital Living Network Alliance) Devices. These external
devices must also be DLNA-compliant. Wi-Fi capability can
be provided to TVs via a digital multimedia streamer.
Important! You must first connect both of your communicating
devices to the same Wi-Fi and be using an
active/registered Samsung account prior to using
this application. For more information, refer to “WiFi Settings” on page 119. For more information,
refer to “Creating a Samsung Account” on page
14.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
• In no event will rented Media Content be available for a period
of more than thirty (30) days (or shorter on a title-by-title basis)
after the Media Content has been rented (e.g., if you begin
viewing rented Media Content on the 29th day after the rental
transaction, but do not finish viewing the entire title, that rented
Media Content may not be available for the entire twenty-four
(24) consecutive hour period if such period would extend the
viewable time beyond the thirty (30) day rental window).
Fo
This application wirelessly synchronizes your Samsung
device with your TV, streams content, and even keeps tabs
on who calls or sends text messages with real-time,
on-screen monitoring. Samsung Link makes staying
connected easy.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Samsung Link
2. Tap Sign in to sign into your Samsung Account if you
have not already done so.
3. If prompted, read the on-screen message about
network charges and tap OK to continue and return to
the main Samsung Link screen.
4. Tap Start and follow the on-screen prompts.
Multimedia
84
y
• My device: displays your device name as it is used with
Samsung Link. Tap to change the device name.
• Save to: allows you to save your media to your internal phone
memory or to an SD card.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
6. The DEVICES & STORAGE screen contains two separate
streaming media options:
• Registered storage: allows you to receive and playback media
stored externally (server, laptop, etc.) directly on your device by
allowing you to add a Web storage service for streaming
content.
• Registered storage: allows you to add a Web storage location.
Without a storage service/location added, you will not be able
to use Samsung Link.
nl
5. Scroll across the application screen to view either
MY RECENT CONTENT or DEVICES & STORAGE.
• Registered devices: allows you to stream/share selected
multimedia content from your device to DLNA compliant device
connected to the same Wireless Access Point.
Configuring Samsung Link Settings
Samsung Link must first be configured prior to its initial use.
You must setup parameters such as connected Wi-Fi, Items
to share, source server address, and external device
acceptance rights.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Samsung Link
➔ DEVICES & STORAGE tab.
85
Fo
2. Press
and then tap Settings and configure the
following settings as desired:
• Auto upload: allows you to enable automatic upload of images
from your device to those storage locations specified within the
Web storage list. Touch and slide the slider to the right to turn it on
• Video optimization: allows you to setup the video quality for
streamed video content. Touch and slide the slider to the right to
turn it on
• Password lock: allows you to restrict access to Samsung Link
by requiring a user enter the currently active and associated
Samsung account password. Touch and slide the slider to the
right to turn it on
• My account: displays Samsung account information.
• Customer support: allows you to contact the Samsung Link
team via a new email from an available email account.
Important! Make sure all communicating devices are
connected to the same Wi-Fi.
2. From the Home screen, tap
7. On a target device (ex: Internet TV) select the
on-screen Allow button to continue.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
1. Launch AllShare Play/Samsung Link on the target
device (such as an Internet TV, Samsung Tablet, etc.).
6. Tap
(Stream to connected devices) and select an
available target device to begin streaming.
Sharing Media via Samsung Link to a Target
Device
5. Tap an available on-screen file, image, or video to
place a green check mark alongside it.
nl
• About this service: displays application information
Note: At this stage your device is requesting access to share
media with the external source.
➔ Samsung Link
Note: You must be signed in to your Samsung Account before
you can use this feature.
3. Tap your device name from the Registered devices
area.
Fo
4. Tap an available category tab (Pictures, Music, Movies,
Files, or Info) and select a file.
• A file with
in the upper-left indicates it is stored remotely
on a Web storage location. Selecting this media causes your
device to access the file currently stored on your services’
servers.
8.
Confirm
(Samsung Link Controller enabled)
appears in the Notification area at the top of the device
to indicate you are using your device as the media
source.
AT&T Locker
AT&T Locker allows you to store, share, and sync all of your
photos, videos, and documents in one safe, convenient
place; the AT&T cloud.
1. Sign on to your Google account if you are not already
signed on. For more information, refer to “Creating a
New Google Account” on page 14.
2. From the Home screen, tap
➔ AT&T Locker
Multimedia
86
3. At the AT&T Locker home screen, tap Sign Up to create
an account or tap Log In if you already have an
account.
4. Follow the on-screen instructions to use AT&T Locker.
Playing Music
➔ Music
2. Tap a library category at the top of the screen (Songs,
Playlists, Albums, Artists, Music square, or Folders) to
view the available music files.
3. Scroll through the list of songs and tap an entry to
begin playback.
Fo
4. The following Music controls are available:
Pause the song.
Start the song after pausing.
87
nl
Volume control showing volume muted.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
Music is an application that can play music files. Music
supports files with extensions AAC, AAC+, eAAC+, MP3,
WMA, 3GP, MP4, and M4A. Launching Music allows you to
navigate through your music library, play songs, and create
playlists (music files bigger than 300 KB are displayed).
1. Tap
Press and hold to fast-forward the song. Tap to
go to next song.
Volume control.
Music
Press and hold to rewind the song. Tap to go to
previous song.
Plays the entire song list once.
Replays the current list when the list ends.
Repeats the currently playing song.
Shuffles the current list of songs randomly.
Songs play in order and are not shuffled.
Lists the current playlist songs.
Displays the current song in the player window.
Assign the current song as a Favorite.
Streams the current music file to another device
via Samsung Link.
Music Settings
2. The follow options are available before you play music:
• Add to playlist: allows you to add the current music file to a
selected playlist.
• Via Bluetooth: scans for devices and pairs with a Bluetooth
headset.
• Delete: deletes the music file.
2. Press
➔ Settings.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
Note: The following options may or may not appear depending
on whether or not music is actually playing. Also,
options will be different if the song you are listening to is
in a playlist.
The Music Settings menu allows you to set preferences for
the Music app such as whether you want the music to play in
the background, sound effects, and how the music menu
displays.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Music
To access additional options, follow these steps:
1. While in Music, press
nl
Music Options
• Search: allows you to search your device for a certain song.
• Settings: allows you to change your Music settings. For more
information, refer to “Music Settings” on page 88.
Fo
• End: allows you to end the Music app.
3. Select one of the following settings:
• SoundAlive: set a type of equalization such as Normal, Pop,
Rock, Jazz, Dance, Classic, etc.
• Adapt sound: allows you to set Adapt sound on when your are
listening with earphones to alert of incoming calls and
notifications.
• Play speed: set the play speed anywhere between 0.5X and
2.0X using the slider.
• Music menu: this menu allows you to select which categories
you want to display. Choices are: Albums, Artists, Genres,
Music square, Folders, Composers, Years, Most played,
Recently played, or Recently added. Tap each item that you
want to display in the Music menu.
Multimedia
88
• Smart volume: automatically adjusts each track’s volume to an
equal level.
Using Playlists
Playlists are used to assign songs to a list of preferred media
which can then be grouped into a list for later playback.
These Playlists can be created via either the handset’s Music
options menu or from within a 3rd party music application
(such as Windows Media Player) and then downloaded to the
handset.
1. From the Home screen, tap
2. Tap the Playlists tab.
3. Press
➔ Create playlist.
➔ Music
89
Fo
4. Type a name for this playlist in the field and tap OK.
3. Tap the playlist name in which to add music.
4. Tap
(Add music).
5. Tap a music file, or tap Select all to add all the music
tracks to this playlist then tap Done.
Removing Music from a Playlist
To remove music files from a playlist:
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Music
2. Tap the Playlists tab.
3. Tap the playlist name in which to delete music.
4. Press
Creating a Playlist
➔ Music
2. Tap the Playlists tab.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
• Voice control: allows you to use voice commands to control
the Music app.
To add files to the playlist:
1. From the Home screen, tap
• Lyrics: when activated, displays lyrics when available.
Adding Music to a Playlist
nl
• Music auto off: when activated, music will automatically turn
off after a set interval.
➔ Remove.
5. Tap the checkbox to the left of each track you want to
remove from this playlist, or tap Select all to remove all
the music tracks from this playlist, then tap Remove.
Besides adding and removing music files in a playlist, you
can also rename the playlist.
➔ Music
➔ Edit title.
4. Tap a playlist name to edit.
5. Enter a new name for the playlist then tap OK.
For information on downloading music for your phone, see
“Google Play Music” on page 90.
Google Play Music
With Google Play Music, you can play music that you have
added to your music file as well as any music you copied
from your PC. While offline, you can listen to music you have
copied from your PC.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Play Music
Fo
All music on your device and external SD card is
displayed including Music folders that may contain
multiple songs.
2. Tap a song to start playback.
• Settings: allows you to view Open source licenses and the
music version for the Play Music application.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
2. Tap Playlists.
3. Press
4. Tap
for the following options:
• Shuffle all: allows you to play all of your music in a shuffled
order.
nl
To edit a playlist:
1. From the Home screen, tap
3. From the main Play Music screen, you can tap any of
the following tabs for a more detailed listing of songs:
Playlists, Recent, Artists, Albums, Songs, and Genres.
Editing a Playlist
• Help: allows you to view a help file on the Google Support
website.
Mobile TV
Mobile TV is a subscription service that allows you to watch
your favorite TV shows using your handset.
Note: This feature requires a paid subscription. See your AT&T
Customer Service Representative for more information.
1. Tap
➔ Mobile TV
Note: The first time you use Mobile TV, you will need to
download the application from the Play Store. For more
information, refer to “Play Store” on page 194.
Multimedia
90
2. The Play Store displays the Mobile TV application. Tap
Update.
3.
Tap Accept & download.
3. The following video controls are available:
Pause the video.
Start the video after being paused.
4. Tap Open.
Press and hold to rewind the video. Tap to
go to previous video.
6. The Mobile TV main page displays. Follow the onscreen instructions to watch TV.
Press and hold to fast-forward the video.
Tap to go to next video.
Volume control.
Note: Mobile TV will use a large amount of data and you are
responsible for all data charges. It is strongly
recommended that you upgrade to a large data plan in
addition to this purchase.
PIP (Picture In Picture) view. The video will
be played in a small window so you can use
your phone for other purposes while watching
the video. Double-tap screen to return to
previous size.
nl
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
Video
The Video application plays video files stored on your phone
or microSD card.
1. Tap
➔ Video
All videos that you have on your phone and memory
card will be displayed.
Fo
2. Tap the video that you want to play.
The video will begin to play.
91
5. Read the Terms and Conditions and tap Accept & Start
Trial to continue or Exit to exit.
Original size view. The video will be played in
its original size.
Full-screen in ratio view. The video is
enlarged as much as possible without
becoming distorted.
Full-screen view. The entire screen is used,
which may cause some minor distortion.
For more information on downloading videos for your phone,
see “Samsung Hub” on page 81.
Play Movies & TV
7. Press
for additional options.
Gallery
The Gallery is where you view photos and play back videos.
For photos, you can also perform basic editing tasks, view a
slideshow, set photos as wallpaper or contact image, and
share as a picture message.
1. Tap
➔ Gallery
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
Note: The screen view icons are a three-way toggle. The icon
that is displayed, is the mode that will appear after the
icon is tapped.
5. Tap the TV SHOWS tab to view shows you can rent.
6. Tap the PERSONAL VIDEOS tab to view movies you have
on your phone or memory card.
nl
Streams the video to another device via
Samsung Link.
With Google Play Movies & TV, you can rent thousands of
different movies and television shows. You can watch
instantly, or download your movie or show for offline viewing
at a later time.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔Play Movies & TV
2. Log on to your Google account if you have not already
done so.
Fo
3. Following the on-screen instructions for renting and
viewing movies and TV shows.
All of the Albums that hold your pictures and videos will
be displayed with folder name and number of files.
2. Tap an Album and thumbnails of the contents will be
displayed.
Note: If your device displays that the memory is full when you
access Gallery, delete some of the files by using My Files
or other file management applications and try again. For
more information, refer to “My Files” on page 190.
4. Tap the MOVIES tab to view movies you can rent.
Multimedia
92
1. Tap a video to select it.
2. Tap a thumbnail to view a single picture.
3. The following options are available at the top of the
screen:
• Share via
: allows you to share the picture via Bluetooth,
ChatON, Email, Flipboard, Gmail, Group Play, Messaging,
Picasa, S Memo, Send single image, or Wi-Fi Direct.
• Delete
: allows you to delete the picture.
• Camera
4. Press
: activates the camera.
for additional options.
Viewing Videos
Fo
Note: If no control icons are displayed on the screen in
addition to the picture, tap anywhere on the screen to
display them.
93
3. Press
to play the video.
for additional options.
For video player controls, see “Video” on page 91.
Using S Beam to Share Pictures
This feature (when activated via NFC) allows you to beam
large files directly to another compatible device that is in
direct contact. These files can be larger, such as Videos, HD
pictures, and other large files.You can beam images and
videos from your gallery, music files from your Music, and
more.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
Note: If no control icons are displayed on the screen in
addition to the picture, tap anywhere on the screen to
display them.
2. Tap
1. From the main gallery, press
➔ Slideshow to see a
slideshow of all of your pictures.
nl
Viewing Pictures
2. If not already active, in a single motion touch and slide
the NFC slider to the right to turn it on
3. Tap S Beam and make sure the feature is turned on.
4. If not already active, in a single motion touch and slide
the S Beam slider to the right to turn it on
5. On the source device (containing the desired image or
video), tap
➔ Gallery
6. Locate and tap the selected image to open it in the
preview window.
Note: If the Touch to beam screen does not appear on the
source device:
- Pull them apart
- Verify the image is visible in the preview window on
the source device (providing the file)
- Place them together again
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
Place devices back to back
nl
Important! Neither device must be in Lock mode or displaying
the Lock screen. They must both be active and
unlocked. It is recommended that the target device
be on the Home screen.
8. From the Touch to beam screen, tap the reduced image
preview to begin the transfer (2).
Touch to beam
9. When prompted, separate the two devices. After a few
seconds (depending on file size) the recipient with then
see the transferred file displayed on their screen.
To share multiple pictures via S Beam:
1. On the source device (containing the desired image or
video), tap
➔ Gallery
2. Locate the selected folder.
3. Touch and hold the first image and place a checkmark
on it and all desired images.
Tap the source image
Fo
7. Place the two active NFC-enabled devices back to back
to begin (1).
4. Place the two active NFC-enabled devices back to back
to begin.
Multimedia
94
5. From the Touch to beam screen, tap the reduced image
preview to begin the transfer.
6. When prompted, separate the two devices.
7. The picture(s) is transferred to the other device.
Important! Do not take photos of people without their
permission.
Do not take photos in places where cameras are
not allowed.
Do not take photos in places where you may
interfere with another person’s privacy.
Taking Photos
nl
3. Before you take a picture, use the Up and Down Volume
keys to zoom in or out. You can magnify the picture up
to x4 (400 percent).
– or –
Pinch the screen to zoom out or pinch outwards to
zoom in.
4. If desired, before taking the photo, you can tap
on-screen icons to access various camera options and
settings.
5. You can also tap the screen to move the focus to the
area you touch.
Fo
Taking pictures with your device’s built-in camera is as
simple as choosing a subject, pointing the camera, then
pressing the camera key.
95
➔ Camera
2. Using the phone’s main display screen as a viewfinder,
adjust the image by aiming the camera at the subject.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
This section explains how to use the camera on your phone.
You can take photographs and shoot video by using the builtin camera functionality. Your 8 megapixel camera produces
photos in JPEG format.
Using the Camera
1. From the main Home screen, tap
to activate the camera mode.
Camera
Note: When taking a photo in direct sunlight or in bright
conditions, shadows may appear on the photo.
Taking Dual Camera Photos
With the Dual Camera feature, you can take a picture with
both the front and rear cameras at the same time.
To take a Dual Camera picture:
1. From the camera viewfinder, tap the Dual Camera icon
6. Press the Camera key ( ) until the shutter sounds.
(The picture is automatically stored within your
designated storage location. If no microSD is installed,
all pictures are stored on the Phone.)
Camera Mode
Quick Settings
located at the top left side of the screen.
nl
Dual Camera
Battery
Charge
The camera viewfinder displays an image from the
front-facing camera within a postage stamp picture
frame on top of the main image displayed from the
rear-facing camera.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
Front
Facing
Camera
Record
Video
Take
Picture
Change
Mode
Image
Viewer
(Gallery)
Viewfinder
Effects
7. While viewing a picture, after you have taken it, pinch
the screen outwards to zoom in or pinch the screen
inwards to zoom out.
You can magnify the picture up to x4.
) to take the picture.
To resize the front camera image:
䡲
Touch and hold the postage stamp picture frame until
the resize handles appear, then drag a corner to
enlarge the image.
To reposition the front camera image
䡲
Touch and hold the postage stamp picture frame to
detach it and then move it to a desired location.
to return to the viewfinder.
Fo
8. Press
2. Press the Camera key (
Multimedia
96
– Sound & shot: Use this mode to enrich pictures by adding
– Beauty face: Use this to take photos with lightened faces for
gentler images.
– Drama: Use this to take a series of photos of a moving object
and then merge them together into one image.
– Animated photo: Use this to create a picture in which a few
selected static objects move by animating objects detected by
the device.
– Rich tone (HDR): Use this to take photos with richer colors and
contrasts.
– Best photo: Use this to take multiple photos in a short time,
and then choose the best photos among them. Press the
Shutter button to take multiple photos. When Gallery opens, tap
and hold thumbnails of photos to save, and then tap Done.
– Best face: Use this to take multiple group shots at the same
Fo
time and combine them to create the best possible image. Press
the Shutter button to take multiple photos. When Gallery opens,
tap the yellow frame on each face, and choose the best
individual face for the subject. After choosing a pose for each
individual, tap Done to merge the images into a single photo,
and tap Save.
97
background sounds for a few seconds. The background sound
is recorded for up to 9 seconds after taking the photo.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
There are many different camera modes that you can use to
help optimize your photos depending on the conditions and
your experience.
1. From the camera viewfinder, tap the Mode button MODE
to change the mode to one of the following:
– Auto: Automatically adjusts your camera to optimize color and
brightness. This is the default setting
nl
Camera Modes
– Eraser: Saves the best of 5 taken pictures and removes any
passers by.
– Panorama: Use this to take wide panoramic photos. Press the
Shutter button to take a photo, and then move the camera in
any direction. When the blue frame aligns with the preview
screen, the camera automatically takes another shot in the
panoramic sequence. To stop shooting, press the Shutter button
again.
– Sports: Use this to take fast action photos.
Quick Settings
Configure Camera settings.
Activate or deactivate the flash.
Use this to activate or deactivate night detection.
Activate or deactivate the voice control to take photos.
Select a resolution for videos.
Activate or deactivate the sharing options.
2. The follow settings are located under the Camera,
Camcorder, Share, and General tabs. The settings that
are displayed will depend on what camera mode you
are in.
Camera:
• Photo size: Select a resolution for photos. Use higher
resolution for higher quality. Higher resolution photos take up
more memory.
• Burst shot: allows several photographs to be captured in quick
succession by touching and holding the Camera button.
• Face detection: allows you to adjust the camera focus based
on face detection technology.
Fo
Hide Quick settings.
This section describes the different settings that you can
configure on your camera. Not all of the following options are
available in both still camera and video camera modes. The
available options vary by mode.
1. From the viewfinder, tap
(Quick Settings) ➔
(Camera Settings).
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
Tap
at the top of the display to quickly change Camera
settings. Not all of the following options are available in both
still camera and video camera modes. The available options
vary by mode.
Camera and Camcorder Settings
using the flash. Press the Shutter button to take multiple photos.
Photos are automatically merged into a single photo.
nl
– Night: Use this to take photos in low-light conditions, without
Multimedia
98
• Anti-Shake: compensates for camera movement.
• Auto night detection: activates or deactivates the night
detection feature.
• Save as: allows you to assign rich tone usage to an image.
Camcorder:
• Movie size: Select a resolution for videos. Use higher resolution
for higher quality. Higher resolution videos take up more
memory.
Fo
• Video stabilization: Activate or deactivate Optical Image
Stabilization.
99
• GPS tag: attach a GPS location tag to the photo. To improve
GPS signals, avoid shooting in locations where the signal may
be obstructed, such as between buildings or in low-lying areas,
or in poor weather conditions. Your location may appear on
your photos when you upload them to the Internet. To avoid
this, deactivate the GPS tag setting.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
• ISO: determines how sensitive the light meter is on your digital
camera. Choose from Auto, 100, 200, 400, or 800. Use a
lower ISO number to make your camera less sensitive to light, a
higher ISO number to take photos with less light, or Auto to let
the camera automatically adjust the ISO for each of your shots.
Settings:
nl
• Metering: allows you to set how the camera measures or
meters the light source: Center-weighted, Matrix, or Spot.
• Review: set this option if you want to view each picture after
you take it. Select a time value.
• Volume key: assigns a function to the volume key. Choose
from The zoom key, The camera key, or The record key.
• Timer: Use this for delayed-time shots. You can set the timer to
Off, 2 sec, 5 sec, or 10 sec.
• White balance: Select an appropriate white balance, so
images have a true-to-life colour range. The settings are
designed for specific lighting situations. These settings are
similar to the heat range for white-balance exposure in
professional cameras.
• Exposure value: allows you to adjust the brightness level by
moving the slider.
• Voice control: activates/deactivates voice control feature that
allows you to verbally take a photo.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
• Contextual filename: allows you to have your location added
as part of the filename. You must first activate GPS tag
described above.
• Save as flipped: when set to On, this option allows you to take
and save a mirror-image video when using self-recording
mode.
• Storage: Select the memory location for storage.
• Shutter sound: Turn the shutter sound on or off.
• Reset: Reset the camera settings.
Viewing your Pictures
You can edit your photos using the built-in Photo editor
application on your device. The photo editor application
provides basic editing functions for pictures that you take on
your phone. Along with basic image tuning like brightness,
contrast, and color it also provides a wide variety of effects
used for editing the picture.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Gallery
• Flash: activate or deactivate the flash.
Editing a Photo
nl
• Guidelines: Display viewfinder guides to help composition
when selecting subjects.
After you take a photo, you can access various options from
the Image Viewer. The Image Viewer uses your Gallery. For
more information, refer to “Gallery” on page 92.
2. Select a folder location and tap a file to open it.
3. With the image displayed, press
the Photo editor.
➔ Edit to launch
Note: To select the picture area, touch and hold the current
picture.
4. Select an image area by touching and holding the
image and then selecting an available option:
• Selection mode: provides several on-screen selection options
such as: Select area, Inverse selection, Selection size, and
Selection mode (Magnetic, Lasso, Brush, Round, and Square).
Fo
• Select all: select the entire area of the current image.
Multimedia
100
Previous: move to previous photo project.
Frame: places a pre-created border style atop
your current image.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
Next: move to next photo project.
Drawing: allows you to add draw directly on your
current picture by using either a brush/pen or
eraser.
5. Use the following editor controls to edit your picture:
Sticker: allows you to place various pre-created
on-screen stickers atop your current image.
nl
• Clipboard: copies the currently selected area to your device’s
clipboard.
Rotate: allows you to rotate a photo in all 4
directions. You can also mirror image a photo.
Crop: allows you to crop (cut-out) an area of a
photo.
Color: allows you to Auto adjust color, Brightness,
Contrast, Saturation, Adjust RGB, Temperature,
Exposure, and Hue of a photo.
Effects: allows you to add various effects to your
photo.
101
Fo
Portrait: allows you to apply various face
correction effects such as: Red-eye fix, Airbrush
face, Face brightness, Out-of-focus, Beauty face,
Funny face, or Spot healing.
to access the following options:
6. Press
• Save as: allows you to rename your current image and save it
to your gallery.
• Select image: allows you to select a new image for editing.
• Take picture: allows you to activate the camera and take a
new image for editing.
• Share via: allows you to share your saved photo via AT&T
Locker, Bluetooth, ChatON, Email, Flipboard, Gmail, Google+,
Group Play, Messaging, Picasa, S Memo, or Wi-Fi Direct.
• Set as: assigns the currently saved image as either a: Contact
photo, Home and lock screens, Home screen, or Lock screen.
Shooting Video
6. target area.
7. To capture an image from the video while recording,
tap
. This feature is not available while the
anti-shake feature is activated.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
Note: The camera may not be able to properly record videos to
a memory card with a slow transfer speed.
5. You can tap the screen to move the focus to the area
you touch.
In addition to taking photos, the camera also doubles as a
camcorder that also allows you to record, view, and send
videos.
4. Tap the Video key (
) to begin shooting video. The
red light will blink while recording.
nl
Using the Camcorder
Tip: When shooting video in direct sunlight or in bright
conditions, it is recommended that you provide your
subject with sufficient light by having the light source
behind you.
1. From the main Home screen, tap Camera
activate the camera mode.
to
2. Using the camera’s main display screen as a
viewfinder, adjust the image by aiming the camcorder
at the subject.
Fo
3. Before you take a video, use the Volume control
buttons to zoom in or out. You can magnify the video up
to x4 (400 percent).
8. Tap the Pause key (
) to stop the recording and
save the video file to your Camera folder.
9. Tap the Stop key ( ) to stop the recording and save
the video file to your Camera folder.
10. Once the file has been saved, tap the image viewer,
then tap
to play your video.
11. Press
to return to the viewer.
Viewing your Videos
After you take a video, you can access various options from
the Image Viewer. The Image Viewer uses your Gallery and
the Video player. For more information, refer to “Gallery” on
page 92. Also, see“Video” on page 91.
Multimedia
102
Section 7: Messaging
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
Your phone provides the following message types:
• Text Messages
Types of Messages
Important! When creating a message, adding an image, a
sound file, or a video clip to a text message
changes the message from a text message to a
multimedia message.
nl
This section describes how to send and receive different
types of messages. It also includes the features and
functionality associated with messaging.
• Multimedia (Picture, Video, and Audio) Messages
• Email and Gmail Messages
• Google Talk
• ChatON
The Short Message Service (SMS) lets you send and receive
text messages to and from other mobile phones or email
addresses. To use this feature, you may need to subscribe to
your service provider’s message service.
103
Fo
The Multimedia Messaging Service (MMS) lets you send and
receive multimedia messages (such as picture, video, and
audio messages) to and from other mobile phones or email
addresses. To use this feature, you may need to subscribe to
your service provider’s multimedia message service.
Messaging icons are displayed at the top of the screen and
indicate when messages are received and their type. For
more information, refer to “Indicator Icons” on page 20.
Creating and Sending Messages
1. From the main Home screen, tap Messaging
Compose.
➔
Note: The main Home screen initially contains the Messaging
icon. If you delete it, or if you want to access
Messaging from another Home screen, you must tap
Apps
➔ Messaging .
Options before composing a message
1. From the main Home screen, tap Messaging
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
The contact will be placed in the recipient field.
Message Options
3. If adding a recipient from your Contacts, tap the
contact to place a checkmark then tap Done.
Note: If you exit a message before you send it, it will be
automatically saved as a draft.
nl
2. Tap on the Enter recipient field to manually enter a
recipient or tap
to select a recipient from your
Contacts. You can also select the recipient based on
Groups, Favorites, or Logs.
Note: For the Group option, if the number of recipients is less
than 10, all members in the group will be added. You will
need to delete any unnecessary members in the list by
selecting the trash can icon and deleting unwanted
entries.
Note: Enter additional recipients by separating each entry with
a semicolon (;) then using the previous procedure.
4. Tap the Enter message field and use the on-screen
keypad to enter a message. For more information, refer
to “Entering Text” on page 62.
Fo
5. Add more recipients by tapping the recipient field.
6. Review your message and tap Send
2. Before composing a message, press
to reveal
additional messaging options:
• Search: allows you to search through all of your messages for
a certain word or string of words. Enter a search string in the
Messaging Search window and tap .
• Delete threads: allows you to delete any message thread.
Select the messages to delete and a green checkmark will
appear next to the message. Tap Delete.
• Draft messages: displays the draft messages folder and its
contents.
• Locked messages: displays the locked messages folder and
its contents.
• Scheduled messages: displays the scheduled messages
folder and its contents.
Messaging
104
Options while composing a message
• Add to spam numbers: allows you to tag a number as spam
so that these messages can be directly delivered to your spam
folder.
• Remove from spam numbers allows you to unregister a
number from the spam number list. This option only appears if
the number was previously registered as spam.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
1. While composing a message, press
to reveal
additional messaging options.
• Insert smiley: allows you to add emoticons, such as a happy
face to your message.
• Scheduled message: allows you to assign the current
message for scheduled delivery at a designated time.
• Settings: allows you to access Messaging settings. For more
information, refer to “Messaging Settings” on page 108.
• Delete message: allows you to delete the message.
nl
• Spam messages: displays the spam messages folder and its
contents.
• Add text: allows you to copy text from your contacts, calendar,
or from a memo to add to your message. This is a convenient
feature for adding names, phone numbers, events, etc. to your
message. For more information, refer to “Adding
Additional Text” on page 106.
• Add to Contacts: allows you to add the recipient to your
Contacts list. This option only appears if the recipient is not
already in your Contacts list.
• View contact: allows you to see information on the recipient.
This option only appears if the recipient is in your Contacts list.
Fo
• Add slide: allows you to add a new page to a message.
• Add recipients: allows you to add additional recipients.
105
• Discard: allows you to delete the current message.
• Translate: launches a Translate popup menu. Here you can
both assign the sender’s original language and assign a target
language for the recipient (they will receive your message in the
designated language). Other options include, Check Incoming
messages only, and Include original text in outgoing message.
Tap to create a checkmark.
Adding attachments to a message
To add an attachment to your message, tap
and select
one of the following options:
• Images: allows you to tap an existing image from your Pictures
list to add it to your message.
• Video: allows you to choose an existing video from the Videos list,
then add it to your message.
• Record video: allows you to temporarily exit the message,
You can copy text such as names, phone numbers, and
events from your Contacts, Calendar or a Memo.
1. While composing a message, press
➔ Add text.
2. At the Add text screen, select one of the following:
• S Note: allows you to insert text from an existing S Note.
• Calendar: allows you to add the name, date, and time of a
calendar event to your message.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
record a video clip using the phone’s camera, and then add it
to your message by tapping Save.
Adding Additional Text
a photo with phone’s camera, and then add it to your message by
tapping Save.
nl
• Take a picture: allows you to temporarily exit the message, take
• Audio: allows you to choose an existing audio file from the
Audio list, then add it to your message by tapping the circle to
the right of the audio so that it turns green, then tapping Done.
• Location: allows you to add an address and the link to the
location on Google Maps.
• Record audio: allows you to temporarily exit the message and
• Contacts: allows you to add the name and phone number of
any of your contacts to your message.
record an audio clip using the phone’s microphone. It is then
automatically attached to the message.
• Text templates: allows you to add pre-defined phrases and
sentences.
• S Memo: allows you to add an S Memo that you have created.
• Calendar: allows you to add an event from your calendar. Select
the desired event and tap Done.
• Location: allows you to attach a thumbnail of a map showing
your location.
Fo
• Contacts: allows you to tap on an existing Address Book entry,
then add it to your message by tapping Done.
The information is added to your message.
Viewing New Received Messages
1. When you receive a new message, the new message
icon will appear at the top of your screen.
2. Open the Notification Bar and select the message. For
more information, refer to “Notification Bar” on page
46.
Messaging
106
– or –
then
• Delete thread: deletes the currently selected message thread.
• Add to spam numbers: adds the current sender to a spam list.
ny new texts from this sender are automatically blocked.
4. To scroll through the message (if additional text pages
have been added), touch the screen and in a single
motion, scroll up or down the page.
Message Threads
Sent and received text and picture messages are grouped
into message threads. Threaded messages allow you to see
all the messages exchanged (similar to a chat program) and
displays a contact on the screen. Message threads are listed
in the order in which they were received, with the latest
message displayed at the top.
To access message thread options:
107
From the main Messaging screen, touch and hold the
message to display the following options:
• View contact: displays the Contact’s Overview page.
Fo
䡲
To access additional Bubble options:
䡲
Touch and hold the message bubble within an active
message conversation to display the following options:
• Delete message: deletes any currently selected message
bubble from the thread.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
3. To play a multimedia message, tap
• To pause playback of the multimedia message, tap
The selected message appears in the display.
nl
From the main Home screen, tap Messaging
tap the new message to view it.
• Add to contact: begins the process of adding the new number
to your Contacts list.
• Copy message text: copies the currently selected message
bubble from the thread.
• Lock/Unlock message: locks or unlocks the currently selected
message bubble from being accidentally deleted.
• Forward: allows you to forward the currently selected message
bubble to an external recipient.
• Copy to SIM: copies the currently selected message bubble as
a single text message within the SIM card.
• View message details: displays details for the currently
selected message bubble.
Deleting a single message thread
1. From the main Home screen, tap Messaging
2. Touch and hold a message, then tap Delete thread.
Deleting multiple message threads
1. From the main Home screen, tap Messaging
2. Press
➔ Delete threads.
3. Tap each message you want to delete. A checkmark
will appear beside each message you select.
4. Tap Delete.
5. At the Delete prompt, tap OK to delete or Cancel to
cancel.
Message Search
4. All messages that contain the search string you
entered are displayed.
Messaging Settings
To configure the settings for text messages, multimedia
messages, Voice mails, and Push messages.
➔
1. From the main Home screen, tap Messaging
➔ Settings.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
3. At the Delete prompt, tap OK to delete or Cancel to
cancel.
➔ Search.
Deleting Messages
2. Tap
3. Use the on-screen keypad to enter a word or phrase to
search for, then tap
nl
• Translate: translates the text from the currently selected
bubble into a desired language.
Fo
You can search through your messages by using the
Message Search feature.
1. From the main Home screen, tap Messaging
2. The following Messaging settings are available:
General settings:
• Delete old messages: deletes old messages when the limit is
reached, rather than having them overwritten.
• Text message limit: allows you to set a limit on how many text
messages can be in one conversation.
• Multimedia message limit: allows you to set a limit on how
many multimedia messages can be in one conversation.
• Text templates: allows you to edit or add new text templates to
use in your messaging.
Messaging
108
– Free: you may add any content to the message.
Text message (SMS) settings:
• Message center: allows you to enter the number of your
Message center where your messages reside while the system
is attempting to deliver them.
Display:
nl
• Bubble style: allows you to choose from several bubble styles
for your messages. Bubbles are the rounded boxes that
surround each message.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
• Input mode: allows you to set the input mode for your text
messages. Choose between GSM Alphabet, Unicode, or
Automatic.
• Manage SIM card messages: allows you to manage the
messages that you have stored on your SIM card.
• MMS alert: allows you to receive an alert when MMS mode
becomes active.
Multimedia message (MMS) settings:
• Group messaging: allows you to send a single message to
multiple recipients.
• Use the volume key: allows you to change the text size by
using the up or down volume keys.
Push message settings:
• Auto-retrieve: allows the message system to retrieve
messages automatically.
• Push messages: allows you to receive push messages from
the network.
• Creation mode: allows you to select the creation mode, Free,
Restricted, or Warning.
Cell Broadcast (CB) settings:
– Restricted: you can only create and submit messages with
content belonging to the Core MM Content Domain.
– Warning: the phone will warn you via pop up messages that
Fo
you are creating a multimedia message which does not fit the
Core MM Content Domain.
109
• Background style: allows you to choose from several
background styles for your messages.
• CB activation: allows you to receive Cell Broadcast (CB)
messages.
• Channel configuration: allows you to set up the channel that
you will receive CB messages on.
• Select ringtone: allows you to set the ringtone for your
message notifications.
• Message alert repetition: allows you to set the interval for new
message alerts. Choose from: Once, Every 2 minutes, or Every
10 minutes.
• Preview message: when enabled, allows you to view a
preview of new message text on the Status bar.
Emergency message settings:
• Add signature: when enabled, this feature allows you to create
a signature at the end of your outgoing text messages.
• Signature text: allows you to enter a desired signature for your
message.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
• Vibrate: allows you to configure the vibration mode associated
with message alerts.
Signature settings:
• Notifications: allows you to see message notifications on your
status bar.
• Alert reminder: allows you to set reminders after you receive
an alert. You can select Once, Every 2 minutes, Every 15
minutes, or Off (default).
nl
Notifications settings:
• Emergency alerts: allows you to receive wireless emergency
alerts from the Commercial Mobile Alerting System (CMAS).
For more information, refer to “Emergency Alerts” on page
111.
Spam message settings:
• Spam settings: when enabled, allows you to configure
available spam settings such as:
• Add to spam numbers: allows you to manually enter and
assign a phone number as being sent from a spam source.
• Add to spam phrases: allows you to assign a specific text
phrase as belonging to a spam message. Ex: Dear friend.
• Block unknown senders: when active, automatically blocks
incoming messages from unknown sources or blocked numbers.
Fo
• Emergency notification review: allows you to play the
emergency alert tone so you will know what to expect when an
alert is received.
Messaging
110
Emergency Alerts allows customers to receive
geographically-targeted messages. Alert messages are
provided by the US Department of Homeland Security and
will alert customers of imminent threats to their safety within
their area. There is no charge for receiving an Emergency
Alert message.
There are three types of Emergency Alerts:
• Alerts issued by the President
• Alerts involving imminent threats to safety of life (Extreme and
Severe)
111
Fo
• AMBER Alerts (missing child alert)
2. Press
➔ Settings.
3. Scroll to the bottom and tap Emergency alerts.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
This device is designed to receive wireless emergency alerts
from the Commercial Mobile Alerting System (CMAS) which
may also be known as the Personal Localized Alerting
Network (PLAN). If your wireless provider has chosen to
participate in CMAS/PLAN, alerts are available while in the
provider's coverage area. If you travel outside your provider's
coverage area, wireless emergency alerts may not be
available. For more information, please contact your wireless
provider.
Customers may choose not to receive Imminent Threats
(Extreme and Severe) and AMBER Alerts. Alerts issued by the
President can not be disabled. To disable Imminent Threats
and AMBER Alerts, follow the instructions below:
1. From the main Home screen, tap Messaging
nl
Emergency Alerts
4. All alerts are enabled by default (checkmark showing).
Tap on an alert option to disable the alert and remove
the checkmark.
Using Email
Email enables you to review and create email using various
email services. You can also receive text message alerts
when you receive an important email.
Creating an Email Account
1. From the Home screen, tap Email
Your accounts screen displays with an Email setup
screen displayed.
2. Enter you email address in the Email address field.
3. Enter your password in the Password field.
5. Tap Next.
6. At the Account options screen, tap any of the options
you would like.
5. If you want all of your emails sent from this email
account by default, tap the checkbox to create a
checkmark. This checkbox only appears if you have
previously set up an email account.
6. Tap Manual setup.
4. If you want to see your password as it is being typed,
tap Show password to create a checkmark.
7. Tap the Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync field.
8. Enter a name for this email account (optional).
8. Enter all the Exchange server information, Domain,
User name and Password, then tap Next.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
9. Tap Done.
nl
7. Tap Next.
Creating a Corporate Email Account
Use the following procedure to configure your phone to
synchronize with a corporate email account.
1. From the Home screen, tap Email
Your accounts screen displays with an Email setup
screen displayed.
2. Enter you email address in the Email address field.
3. Enter your password in the Password field.
Fo
4. If you want to see your password as it is being typed,
tap Show password to create a checkmark.
9. At the Activation prompt, tap OK.
The Account options screen is displayed.
10. Enter the desired information in the different fields,
then tap Next.
11. Enter an Account name for this account (Optional) and
tap Done.
Wait for the Inbox to synchronize before use.
12. Press
➔ Settings to change the account settings.
Creating Additional Email Accounts
To create additional email accounts after setting up your first
account, follow these steps:
1. From the Home screen, tap Email
Messaging
112
➔ Settings.
3. Tap Add account to add another email account.
Switching Between Email Accounts
1. From the Home screen, tap Email
at the top of your screen.
Your Email accounts screen is displayed.
3. Tap the Email account Inbox you would like to switch
to. You can also select Combined inbox which will
display email messages from all accounts.
113
Fo
4. The new Email account is displayed.
Note: You must sign in to your Gmail account in order to
access Gmail.
Your Email screen displays showing your emails from
the active account.
2. Tap the Inbox button
Signing into Your Gmail
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
4. Enter the information required to set up another
account. For more information, refer to “Creating an
Email Account” on page 111.
Gmail is Google’s web-based email. When you first setup the
phone, Gmail is configured. Depending on the
synchronization settings, Gmail is automatically synchronized
with your Gmail account.
2. Press
Using Gmail
nl
Your Email screen displays showing your emails from
the active account.
1. Sign on to your Google account if you are not already
signed on. For more information, refer to “Creating a
New Google Account” on page 14.
2. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Gmail
3. Follow the on-screen instructions.
The Inbox loads conversations and email.
Creating a Gmail Message
1. From the Gmail Inbox, tap
at the bottom of the
screen to create a new message.
2. Enter the recipients Email address in the To field.
Separate multiple recipient email addresses with a
comma.
3. Tap
copy.
and select Add Cc/Bcc to add a carbon or blind
• Mute: allows you to mute the sound in a message if applicable.
• Report spam: allows you to report a message as spam. Tap
the UNDO option if you change your mind.
5. Tap the Compose email field and begin composing your
message.
• Report phishing: allows you to report a message that you feel
is trying to improperly get information from you.
6. Tap
• Settings: displays Email settings that you can modify.
nl
1. From the Gmail Inbox, tap a message to view it.
2. The following options are available at the bottom of the
screen after a message has been selected:
• Archive
: archives the selected message.
• Delete
: deletes the message.
• Labels
: allows you to attach labels to a message. This is
similar to putting it in a folder.
• Mark Unread
• Send feedback: allows you to send feedback or report a
problem.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
to send.
Viewing a Gmail Message
4. Enter the subject of this message in the Subject field.
: after reading a message, marks as unread.
• Newer: swipe your screen to the right to see newer messages.
• Older: swipe your screen to the left to see older messages.
Fo
3. Press
to select one of the following additional
options:
• Mark important/not important: allows you to set the
importance of a message.
• Help: displays the Google.com webpage so you can search the
web for help.
Other Gmail Options
1. Tap
at the bottom of the screen to refresh the
screen, send and receive new emails, and synchronize
your email with the Gmail account.
2. Tap
at the bottom of the screen to set up and
manage Labels for your Gmail messages.
3. Tap
at the bottom of the screen to search through
your Gmail messages.
Messaging
114
2. From the Home screen, tap
3. Begin using Google Talk.
➔ Talk
4. Press
➔ Help for more information on using
Google Talk.
Note: The Network confirms your login and processes. This
could take up to 5 minutes to complete.
Google +
Fo
Google+ makes messaging and sharing with your friends a
lot easier. You can set up Circles of friends, visit the Stream
to get updates from your Circles, use Messenger for fast
115
2. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Google+
3. Select the account you want to use to sign in to
Google+.
– or –
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
Google Talk is a free Windows and web-based application for
instant messaging offered by Google. Conversation logs are
automatically saved to a Chats area in your Gmail account.
This allows you to search a chat log and store them in your
Gmail accounts.
1. Log on to your Google account if you have not already
done so. For more information, refer to “Creating a
New Google Account” on page 14.
messaging with everyone in your Circles, or use Instant
Upload to automatically upload videos and photos to your
own private album on Google+.
1. Sign on to your Google account. For more information,
refer to “Creating a New Google Account” on page 14.
nl
Google Talk
Tap Add account to create another account.
4. Follow the on-screen instructions to use Google+.
5. Visit www.google.com/mobile/+/ for more information.
Messenger
Messenger allows you to bring groups of friends together into
a simple group conversation. When you get a new
conversation in Messenger, Google+ sends an update to your
phone.
1. Sign on to your Google account. For more information,
refer to “Creating a New Google Account” on page 14.
2. From the Home screen, tap
– or –
➔ Messenger
Tap Add account to create another account.
5. Tap Next at the bottom of the screen.
6. At the Messenger screen, tap
message.
to start a new
7. In the upper text field, enter a name, email address, or
circle.
8. In the bottom message field, enter a message then tap
AT&T Messages brings your texts, calls, and voicemail
messages together into a single conversation thread and is
accessible by phone or computer.
➔ Messages
1. From the Home screen, tap
2. Sign on to your Google account if you are not already
signed on. For more information, refer to “Creating a
New Google Account” on page 14.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
4. Follow the on-screen instructions to add or follow
people.
Messages App
3. Select the account you want to use to sign in to
Google+ and tap OK.
– or –
nl
From the Google+ application, select Messenger.
9. From the Messenger screen, tap Learn more for more
detailed information.
Note: The first time you use the Messages app, you will need
to download the updated application from the Play
Store. When the Play Store page displays, tap Update.
For more information, refer to “Play Store” on page
194.
3. At the Welcome screen, read the information and tap
Continue or tap Learn More to receive more
information.
Fo
4. The first time you use Messages, you will need to set
up a few things. Tap Record Greeting to record a
personal greeting, or tap Skip if you want to do it later.
Messaging
116
5. Follow the on-screen instructions to use the Messages
app.
For more information, visit: https://web.samsungchaton.com.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ ChatON
2. At the ChatON display, tap Sign in to sign in to your
Samsung account if you have not already done so. For
more information, refer to “Creating a Samsung
Account” on page 14.
– or –
Tap Skip if you have already signed in to your Samsung
account.
3. Enter your real name and tap
OK.
Fo
4. Follow the on-screen instructions to add a buddy and
begin your chat session.
117
nl
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
Provides a global mobile communication service where you
can chat with more than 2 buddies via a group chat. Share
things such as pictures, videos, animation messages
(Scribbles), audio, Contacts, Calendar entries, and Location
information.
ChatON
Section 8: Changing Your Settings
From any Home screen, press
Settings Tabs
➔ Settings
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
1. From any Home screen, tap
– or –
My device:
This tab provides access to device configuration
and customization features. Features include:
Lock screen, Display, LED indicator, Sound, Home
screen mode, Call, Blocking mode, Power saving
mode, Accessory, Accessibility, Language and
input, Motions and gestures, Smart screen, Air
view, and Voice control.
Accessing Settings
My device
nl
This section explains the settings used for customizing your
device.
➔ Settings.
The Settings are divided into 4 main groups. When the
Settings screen displays, the following 4 tabs are located at
the top of the screen:
Fo
Connections:
This tab allows you to see all of settings related to
the connection of your device to external sources.
Features include: Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, Data usage,
More networks (Airplane mode, Mobile networks,
Tethering and portable hotspot, and VPN), NFC,
S Beam, Nearby devices, Screen Mirroring, and
Kies via Wi-Fi.
Accounts:
This tab provides both the ability to create and
modify your accounts (example; Samsung account,
Email, Google account, etc.) and access Backup and
reset features.
More:
This tab provides access to the remaining set of
device settings not listed under the other three tabs.
These include Location services, Security,
Application manager, Battery, Storage, Date and
time, and About device.
Changing Your Settings
118
Note: The settings for your device are described below in the
order that they appear within the Settings menu. Options
under the Connections tab are listed first, followed by
My device, Accounts, and More settings.
1. From the Home screen, tap
Connections ➔ Wi-Fi.
nl
Activating Wi-Fi
Advanced Wi-Fi Settings
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
This section describes the Wi-Fi settings. For information on
how to use Wi-Fi, see “Wi-Fi” on page 169.
➔ Settings ➔
2. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the Wi-Fi
field, to turn Wi-Fi ON
3. Tap Scan to scan for available Wi-Fi networks. For more
information, refer to “Connect to a Wi-Fi Network” on
page 170.
Fo
Wi-Fi Direct allows device-to-device connections so you can
transfer large amounts of data over a Wi-Fi connection.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
Connections ➔ Wi-Fi.
119
3. At the bottom of the Wi-Fi screen, tap the Wi-Fi Direct
button.
For more information, refer to “Wi-Fi Direct” on page
172.
Wi-Fi Settings
Activating Wi-Fi Direct
2. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the Wi-Fi
Direct field, to turn Wi-Fi Direct ON
The advanced Wi-Fi settings allow you to set up and manage
wireless access points.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
Connections ➔ Wi-Fi.
2. Press
➔ Advanced.
The following options are available:
• Network notification: alerts you when a new WAP is available.
• Passpoint: allows you to connect to passpoint-enabled Wi-Fi
Access Points automatically. Touch and slide the slider to the
right to turn it on
• Keep Wi-Fi on during sleep: allows you to specify when to
disconnect from Wi-Fi.
• Check for Internet service: Checks if Wi-Fi internet service is
available when connected to an AP (Access Point).
• IP address: view your device’s IP address.
Bluetooth settings
Activating Bluetooth
1. From the Home screen, tap
Connections.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
In this menu you can activate Bluetooth, view or assign a
device name, activate your phone so other Bluetooth devices
can discover it, or scan for other, available Bluetooth devices
with which to pair.
➔ Settings ➔
2. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the
Bluetooth field, to turn Bluetooth ON
The Bluetooth icon
is displayed on the status bar.
Additional Bluetooth Settings
3. Press
and select a Bluetooth setting to configure:
• Visibility timeout: Use this setting to control when to
automatically turn off the Discoverable option: 2 minutes, 5
minutes, 1 hour, or Never time out.
• MAC address: view your device’s MAC address, required
when connecting to some secured networks (not configurable).
2. Tap Scan to scan for nearby discoverable devices. After
searching, tap a device to pair with it. For more
information, refer to “Pairing Bluetooth Devices” on
page 175.
nl
• Auto connect: allows you to be automatically connected to an
AT&T Wi-Fi Hotspot as soon as your phone detects it.
Fo
When Bluetooth is on, additional settings are available.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
Connections ➔ Bluetooth.
• Received files: Shows the list of files received by using
Bluetooth.
• Help: Provides additional information on Bluetooth and
Bluetooth settings.
4. Tap the checkbox next to SAMSUNG-SGH-I527 if you do
not want your phone visible to other Bluetooth devices.
Data Usage
From this screen you can view your Mobile data usage and
turn your Mobile data capability On or Off.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
Connections ➔ Data usage.
2. Tap Mobile data to create a checkmark and turn Mobile
data usage on.
Changing Your Settings
120
5. Tap the Data usage cycle drop-down menu and select a
date.
䡲
From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
Connections ➔ More networks.
Options display for Airplane mode, Mobile networks,
Tethering and portable hotspots, and VPN.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
The data usage displays as a visual (chart) and also
displays a list of each application with a breakdown of
how much data was used per application.
This option displays additional Connectivity information.
4. Touch and drag the red limit bar to the GB limit that you
desire.
More networks
nl
3. Tap Set mobile data limit to create a checkmark and
allow a data limit to be set.
Note: Data is measured by your device. Your service provider
may account for data usage differently.
6. Press
to display additional options. Tap to activate.
• Data roaming: enables data roaming on your device.
• Restrict background data: restricts some apps and services
from working unless you are connected to a Wi-Fi network.
Airplane mode allows you to use many of your phone’s
features, such as Camera, Games, and more, when you are
in an airplane or in any other area where making or receiving
calls or data is prohibited.
Important! When your phone is in Airplane Mode, it cannot
send or receive any calls or access online
information or applications.
• Auto-sync data: allows your accounts to automatically sync
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
Connections ➔ More networks.
• Show Wi-Fi usage: displays a Wi-Fi tab that shows Wi-Fi
usage.
2. Tap the Airplane mode checkbox to create a
checkmark and activate the feature.
• Mobile hotspots: displays available mobile hotspots.
3. At the Enable airplane mode prompt, tap OK.
Fo
121
Airplane mode
Mobile networks
To enable data access over the mobile network, this option
must be selected. It is set on by default.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
Connections ➔ More networks ➔ Mobile networks.
2. Tap Mobile data to create a checkmark and activate the
feature.
Data Roaming
To use Wi-Fi you need access to a wireless access point
(hotspot).
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
Connections ➔ More networks ➔ Mobile networks.
2. Tap Access Point Names.
A list of the Access Point names display. The active
access point displays a green, filled circle to the right
of the name.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
Before you use applications such as Google Maps and find
your location or search for places of interest, you must
enable the Mobile networks options.
Mobile data
Access Point Names
is displayed at the top of
nl
The Airplane mode icon
your screen.
Data roaming allows you to connect to your service
provider’s partner networks and access data services when
you are out of your service providers area of coverage.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
Connections ➔ More networks ➔ Mobile networks.
Fo
2. Tap Data roaming to create a checkmark and activate
the feature.
Network Operators
Using this feature you can view the current network
connection. You can also scan and select a network operator
manually, or set the network selection to Automatic.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
Connections ➔ More networks ➔ Mobile networks.
2. Tap Network operators.
The current network connection displays at the bottom
of the list.
Important! You must deactivate data service prior to searching
for an available network.
Changing Your Settings
122
2. Tap Network operators.
3. Tap Default setup.
4. Tap Manual to locate and connect to a network
manually, or tap Automatic to allow the device to
automatically select a network.
Tethering & portable hotspot
Fo
This option allows you to share your phones’s mobile data
connection via USB or as a portable Wi-Fi hotspot.
USB tethering
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
Connections ➔ More networks ➔ Tethering and
portable hotspot.
123
Mobile Hotspot
Note: To enable Mobile Hotspot on your phone, dial 611 or go
to att.com/mywireless to set up the service.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
Your phone default is set to Automatic (to automatically
search for an available network. You can set this option to
Manual to select a network each time you connect.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
Connections ➔ More networks ➔ Mobile networks.
3. Tap USB tethering to add a checkmark and activate the
feature. The USB tethering icon
is displayed at the
top of your screen.
Default setup options
2. Connect your phone to your PC using a USB cable.
nl
Note: Connecting to 2G networks slows the data transfer
speed and time.
1. From the Home screen, tap
– or –
➔ Mobile Hotspot
From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
Connections ➔ More networks ➔ Tethering and
portable hotspots ➔ Mobile Hotspot.
2. Turn Mobile Hotspot on by tapping the slider so that it
changes to the ON position
The Mobile Hotspot icon
your screen.
is displayed at the top of
3. Tap Configure at the bottom of the screen.
4. Enter or edit the Network SSID, Hide my device,
Security setting, and Password.
5. Tap Show password and Show advanced options to see
them displayed.
䡲
From the Tethering and portable hotspot menu, tap Help
for additional information
VPN settings
6. Tap Save.
Help
nl
The VPN settings menu allows you to set up and manage
Virtual Private Networks (VPNs).
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
7. Press
for the following option:
• Timeout settings: allows you to set the time your device will be
available as a portable Wi-Fi hotspot.
Connecting to Portable Wi-Fi hotspot from other
devices
1. Activate Wi-Fi on the device that wants to connect to
your phone.
2. Find GALAXY_S4_XXXX in the Wi-Fi network list and
connect to it. XXXX are four randomly generated digits
that will appear when you set up a Portable Wi-Fi
hotspot on your device.
The connected device can now use internet through
your Portable Wi-Fi hotspot.
Fo
Note: Activating Wi-Fi and connecting to your phone will be
different depending on the type of the other device.
Important! Before you can use a VPN you must establish and
configure one.
Adding a Basic VPN
Before you add a VPN you must determine which VPN
protocol to use: PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol),
L2TP (Layer 2 Tunneling Protocol), L2TP/IPSec PSK (Preshared key based L2TP/IPSec), or L2TP/IPSec CRT
(Certificate based L2TP/IPSec).
1. Before using VPN, you must first set up a screen unlock
PIN or password. For more information, refer to “Lock
Screen Settings” on page 127.
2. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
Connections ➔ More networks ➔ VPN.
3. Tap Basic VPN.
Changing Your Settings
124
6. Select a VPN type from the Type drop-down menu. The
options are:
• PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol)
3. Tap Advanced IPsec VPN.
4. Tap Add VPN connection.
5. Enter a password, confirm the password, and tap OK.
6. Enter a name for the VPN connection in the VPN
connection name field.
• L2TP/IPSec RSA
7. Select a IPsec type from the drop-down menu.
• IPSec Xauth RSA
• IPSec Hybrid RSA
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
• L2TP/IPSec PSK (Layer 2 Tunneling Protocol / Internet Protocol
Security Pre-Shared Key)
• IPSec Xauth PSK
8. Enter any other required information.
9. Tap the Show advanced options check box to display
additional VPN options.
7. Enter the Server address and any other required fields
that are dependent upon the Type you entered
previously.
8. Tap the Show advanced options check box to display
additional VPN options.
9. Tap Save to save your VPN settings.
Adding an IPsec VPN
Fo
1. Before using VPN, you must first set up a screen unlock
PIN or password. For more information, refer to “Lock
Screen Settings” on page 127.
125
2. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
Connections ➔ More networks ➔ VPN.
(Add VPN network).
nl
4. Tap
5. Enter a name for the VPN network in the Name field.
10. Tap Save to save your VPN settings.
NFC
NFC (Near Field Communication) allows data exchange when
you touch your device with another compatible device. This
is used for applications such as Android Beam and S Beam.
To activate NFC, follow these steps:
1. From the Home screen, tap
Connections ➔ NFC.
➔ Settings ➔
2. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the NFC
field, to turn NFC ON
Android Beam
Nearby devices
2. Tap the OFF / ON icon to turn Android Beam ON
nl
2. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
Connections ➔ Nearby devices.
3. Tap the File sharing checkbox to create a checkmark
and activate File sharing.
3. Touch the back of your device with another NFCcapable device and the content is transferred.
S Beam
This option allows you to share your media files with nearby
devices using DLNA and connected to the same Wi-Fi.
1. Connect to a Wi-Fi network. For more information, refer
to “Activating Wi-Fi” on page 119.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
When Android Beam is activated, you can beam app content
to another NFC-capable device by holding the devices close
together. You can beam browser pages, YouTube videos,
contacts, and more.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
Connections ➔ NFC ➔ Android Beam.
4. Verify
screen.
(Nearby devices) appears at the top of the
5. At the Nearby devices prompt, tap OK.
When S Beam is activated, you can beam files to another
NFC-capable device by holding the devices close together.
You can beam images and videos from your Gallery, music
files from your Music app, and more.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
Connections ➔ S Beam.
2. Tap the OFF / ON icon to turn S Beam on
Fo
3. Touch the back of your device with another NFCcapable device and the content is transferred.
6. Tap Shared contents, then check the media you would
like to share. Tap OK.
7. Tap Allowed devices list, then select the connected
devices you would like to allow.
8. Tap Not-allowed devices list, then select the connected
devices you would like to not allow.
9. Tap Download to, then select the destination of any
downloaded (shared) content. Choose from Device or
SD card.
Changing Your Settings
126
10. Tap Upload from other devices, then select the actions
you’ll take when you upload content from other
devices. Choose from either Always accept, Always
ask, or Always reject.
Kies via Wi-Fi allows you to sync your PC wirelessly with your
device provided they are both on the same Wi-Fi network.
You can view and share videos, photos, music, ringtones,
and more.
1. From your PC, download the Samsung Kies application
if you don’t already have it. You can find it at
samsung.com.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
The Screen Mirroring feature allows you to share the media
files on your device screen with an HDMI device such as an
HDMI TV.
nl
Screen Mirroring
Kies via Wi-Fi
2. From your PC, launch the Samsung Kies application.
Note: This feature requires the optional AllShare Cast dongle
which is available as an accessory. See your AT&T
Customer Service Representative for more information.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
Connections ➔ Screen Mirroring.
2. Connect the AllShare Cast dongle to the HDMI device
using an HDMI A-to-A cable.
127
Fo
3. Press
➔ Help for information on using Screen
Mirroring.
3. From your PC, connect to a Wi-Fi network.
4. From the Home screen, tap
Connections ➔ Kies via Wi-Fi.
➔ Settings ➔
5. From your device, connect to the same Wi-Fi network
that your PC is connected to if you have not already
done so. For more information, refer to “Connect to a
Wi-Fi Network” on page 170.
Lock Screen Settings
Choose settings for unlocking your screen. For more
information about using the lock and unlock features, see
“Locking and Unlocking the Touch Screen” on page 12.
➔ Settings ➔
My device
2. Tap Screen lock for these options then follow the onscreen instructions to set up your Screen lock:
• Swipe: Swipe the screen to unlock it.
• Face and voice: Look at your phone and speak to unlock.
• Pattern: A screen unlock pattern is a touch gesture you create
and use to unlock your device. Follow the prompts to create or
change your screen unlock pattern.
• PIN: Select a PIN to use for unlocking the screen.
• Password: Create a password for unlocking the screen.
• None: No pattern, PIN, or password is required. The screen will
never lock.
Lock screen options
➔ Settings ➔
My device
2. The following options are available depending on the
Screen Lock type that you have selected:
Swipe options
• Multiple widgets allows you to display multiple widgets on
your lock screen. Appears as an options after a lock mode is
enabled.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
• Face unlock: Look at your phone to unlock it.
1. From the Home screen, tap
My device ➔ Lock screen.
1. From the Home screen, tap
My device ➔ Lock screen.
nl
Screen Lock
• Lock screen widgets allows you to lock the widgets that are
displayed on your home screens.
• Shortcuts sets shortcuts to appear at the bottom of the Lock
screen. Touch and slide the slider to the right to turn it on
• Unlock effect sets the effect you receive when unlocking the
phone. You can select None, Ripple effect, or Light effect.
• Help text shows help information on the Lock screen.
Activate or deactivates various Unlock screen functions.
Fo
Note: The Lock screen options will differ depending on what
type of Screen Lock you have selected in step 2.
• Wake up in lock screen requires that you say a command to
wake-up your phone.
• Set wake-up command designates your wake-up
commands. Tap Set wake-up command and follow the onscreen prompts to create a new verbal command.
Changing Your Settings
128
In this menu, you can change various settings for the display.
From the Home screen, tap
My device ➔ Display.
• Presence check requires that you blink when using the Face
unlock feature. This will increase the security of the feature.
• Secured lock time allows you to set a time-out for lock screen.
Pattern options
• Lock screen widgets allows you to lock the widgets that are
displayed on your home screens.
My device
The following options display:
• Wallpaper: allows you to set the Wallpaper for your Home
screen, Lock screen, or both. For more information, refer to
“Changing the Wallpaper” on page 44.
• Notification panel: allows you to set the brightness of your
notification panel and also select the quick setting buttons that
you want to display at the top of the notification panel. For more
information, refer to “Notification Bar” on page 46.
• Make pattern visible allows you to see the pattern as you
draw it.
• Multi window: tap this option to enable/disable the automatic
Multi window feature.
• Secured lock time allows you to set a time-out for lock screen.
• Screen mode: allows you to select from several different color
modes.
PIN and Password options
• Lock screen widgets allows you to lock the widgets that are
displayed on your home screens.
Fo
• Secured lock time allows you to set a time-out for lock screen.
129
➔ Settings ➔
䡲
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
• Improve facial recognition allows you to improve your
device’s face matching capability by capturing your face in
different lighting, with or without glasses, and bearded or
clean-shaven. Follow the on-screen instructions.
Display Settings
nl
Face unlock options
• Lock screen widgets allows you to lock the widgets that are
displayed on your home screens.
• Brightness: configures the LCD Brightness levels. Tap
Automatic brightness to allow the phone to self-adjust or drag
the slider and tap OK.
• Auto-rotate screen: allows you to switch the display
orientation automatically when you rotate the phone.
• Screen timeout: adjusts the delay time before the screen
automatically turns off. Selections are: 15 seconds, 30
seconds, 1 minute, 3 minutes, 5 minutes, and 10 minutes.
LED indicator
nl
This option allows you to turn on your LED lights for charging,
missed events, and incoming notifications. The light will turn
on by default unless you turn them off.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
• Daydream: allows you to control what your screen does when
your device is docked or sleeping. Tap the OFF / ON icon next
to Daydream to turn it on
. Follow the on-screen
instructions.
• Auto-adjust touch sensitivity: allows you to adjust the touch
sensitivity of your phone automatically depending on the type of
material on the display.
• Font style: allows you to set the font style that your phone will
use. You can also tap Get fonts online to choose from a wider
selection.
• Font size: allows you to select which size of font is displayed.
• Touch key light duration: allows you to adjust the delay before
the Touch key light automatically turns off.
䡲
From the Home screen, tap
My device ➔ LED indicator.
➔ Settings ➔
My device
3. Tap the following LED indicator options to turn them on
or off:
• Charging: LED lights up when the device is connected to the
charger.
• Display battery percentage: allows you to see the battery
charge percentage next to the battery charge icon at the top of
the display.
• Low battery: LED lights up when the battery level is low.
• Edit after screen capture: allows you to go edit a screen
immediately after taking a screen capture.
• Voice recording: LED lights up when you are recording voice.
The LED only lights up when the screen is off.
• Notifications: LED lights up when you have missed calls,
messages, or application events.
Fo
• Auto adjust screen tone: allows you to save power because
the phone analyzes the displayed screen image and adjusts the
LCD brightness.
Changing Your Settings
130
Ringtones
From this menu you can control the sounds on the phone.
䡲
From the Home screen, tap
My device ➔ Sound.
➔ Settings ➔
My device
2. Tap Ringtones.
3. Tap a ringtone and tap OK.
– or –
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
Volume
The Volume option allows you to change the volume for all
phone sounds in one easy location.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
My device ➔ Sound ➔ Volume.
My device
2. Touch and drag the slider to adjust the sound volume
for Media, Ringtone, Notifications, and System.
Vibration intensity
My device
nl
The following options display:
3. Tap OK.
This option allows you to set the ringtone.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
My device ➔ Sound.
Sound Settings
Tap Add to select a file from your music files.
Vibrations
This option allows you to set your phone to vibrate and ring.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
My device ➔ Sound.
My device
2. Tap Vibrations.
Vibration intensity allows you to select how intense the
vibration is for different options.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
My device ➔ Sound ➔ Vibration intensity.
3. Select a vibration pattern and tap OK.
– or –
My device
Fo
2. Touch and drag the slider to adjust the Vibration
intensity for Incoming call, Notification, and Haptic
feedback.
131
Tap Create and follow the on-screen instructions to
create your own vibration.
This option allows you to set the ringtone that will sound for
notifications and alarms.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
My device ➔ Sound.
My device
2. Tap Notifications.
Vibrate when ringing
• Screen lock sound: makes a sound when your screen is
locked or unlocked.
nl
This option allows you to enable your phone to vibrate
whenever it rings.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
My device ➔ Sound.
• Haptic feedback: makes a vibration when you tap soft keys
and on certain UI interactions.
Adapt sound
My device
2. Tap Vibrate when ringing to create a checkmark and
enable the feature.
System Tone Settings
• Touch sounds: makes a sound when you touch the screen.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
3. Tap a ringtone and tap OK.
2. Tap any of the following options to create a checkmark
and activate the feature:
• Dialing keypad tone: makes a sound when you tap a key on
the keyboard.
Notifications
The Adapt sound feature allows you to customize your call
sounds.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
My device ➔ Sound ➔ Adapt sound.
My device
2. Read the instructions and tap Start.
The System tone settings are used when you use the dialing
pad, make a screen selection, lock your screen, or tap the
screen.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
My device ➔ Sound.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions to set up your
personal call sound.
Fo
My device
Changing Your Settings
132
Call rejection
2. Tap the pull-down dropbox and select one of the
following options:
• Standard mode: provides conventional layout for the apps and
widgets on your home screens.
• Easy mode: provides easier user experience for first-time
smartphone users on the home screens.
3. Tap Apply.
Call Settings
To access the Call settings menu:
䡲
133
From the Home screen, tap
My device ➔ Call.
– or –
From the Home screen, tap
settings.
3. Tap Auto reject mode and tap one of the following
options:
• Off: to turn Auto reject mode off.
• All numbers: to reject all calls.
• Auto reject numbers: to reject all calls in your Reject list.
4. Tap Auto reject list.
5. Tap
to manually add numbers to the Reject list.
6. Tap Unknown, to create a checkmark and automatically
reject all calls that are not in your Contacts list.
Set rejection messages
➔ Settings ➔
My device
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
My device ➔ Call ➔ Set up call rejection messages.
2. Tap
– or –
➔
Fo
䡲
My device
2. Tap the OFF / ON icon to turn Auto reject mode on
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
My device
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
My device ➔ Call ➔ Call rejection.
Home screen mode allows you to set your display to the
conventional layout of Standard mode or provide an easier
user experience for the first-time smartphone users using
Easy mode.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
My device ➔ Home screen mode.
nl
Home screen mode
➔ Call
to manually add a reject message.
My device
Tap one of the pre-written messages to be displayed
when you want the call to be rejected. You can edit the
message if desired.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
My device ➔ Call ➔ Call alerts.
My device
2. Tap the following options to create a checkmark and
activate the features:
• Answer vibration: enables your phone to vibrate when the
called party answers the phone.
Answering/ending calls
My device
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
My device ➔ Call ➔ Answering/ending calls.
nl
3. Tap Save to save the reject message.
Call alerts
2. The following options are available:
• The home key answers calls: Tap this option to be able to
accept incoming calls by pressing the Home key.
• Call-end vibration: enables your phone to vibrate when the
call ends.
• Voice control: Tap this option to be able to accept incoming
calls by using your voice.
• Minute minder: beeps twice every minute that you are on a
call.
• The power key ends calls: This option will allow you to end a
call by pressing the power key without turning off the screen.
• Call end tone: plays a tone when a call is ended.
Turn off screen during calls
This option turns on the proximity sensor during calls so that
your phone will know to turn the screen off to save power.
From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
My device ➔ Call ➔ Turn off screen during calls to
create a checkmark and enable the feature.
My device
Fo
䡲
• Call connect tone: plays a tone when a call is connected.
• Alerts during calls: turns on alarm and message notifications
during a call.
Call Accessories
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
My device ➔ Call ➔ Call accessories.
My device
2. The following options are available:
• Automatic answering: configures the device to automatically
answer and incoming call when a headset is detected.
Changing Your Settings
134
Additional settings
My device
My device
2. Tap Enable FDN.
3. At the prompt, enter your PIN2 code and tap OK.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
My device ➔ Call ➔ Additional settings.
Enabling FDN
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
My device ➔ Call ➔ Additional settings ➔ Fixed dialing
numbers.
2. Tap one of the following options:
• Caller ID: allows you to choose how your Caller ID will be
displayed. Select Network default, Hide number, or Show
number.
• Call forwarding: allows you to forward your calls to another
number.
• Auto area code: allows you to automatically prepend a specific
area code to all outbound calls.
• Call waiting: the network service informs you when someone
is trying to reach you during another call. Tap to activate.
• Auto redial: automatically redials the last number if the call
was either cut off or was unable to connect. Tap to activate.
135
Fo
• Fixed dialing numbers: allows you to restrict outgoing calls to
a limited set of phone numbers.
• Outgoing call conditions: allows you to make calls even when
the device is locked.
Using Fixed Dialing Numbers
nl
• Automatic answering timer: configures the time delay before
the device automatically accepts the incoming call.
FDN is enabled.
4. To enable FDN after it has been disabled, tap Disable
FDN, enter your PIN2 code and tap OK.
Important! Not all SIM cards use a PIN2 code. If your SIM card
does not, this menu does not display.
The PIN2 code is provided by your carrier. Entering
an incorrect PIN2 code could cause the phone to
lock. Contact customer service for assistance.
Changing the PIN2 Code
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
My device ➔ Call ➔ Additional settings ➔ Fixed dialing
numbers.
2. Tap Change PIN2.
My device
4. At the prompt, enter a new PIN2 code.
4. Tap Vibrate when ringing to create a checkmark if you
want your phone to vibrate when a call is incoming.
5. Confirm your PIN2 code.
5.
Note: Before you can manage an FDN list a list must be
created.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
My device ➔ Call ➔ Additional settings ➔ Fixed dialing
numbers.
My device
2. Tap FDN list.
3. A list of all existing FDN numbers will be displayed.
Ringtones and keypad tones
Personalize call sound
This option allows you to personalize the sounds you hear
during a call with and without earphones.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
My device ➔ Call ➔ Personalize call sound.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
When this feature is enabled, you can make calls only to
phone numbers stored in the FDN list on the SIM card.
Tap Keypad tones to create a checkmark if you want
tones to play when the keypad is pressed.
Managing the FDN List
nl
3. At the prompt, enter your old PIN2 code.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
My device ➔ Call ➔ Ringtones and keypad tones.
My device
2. Tap Ringtones, select a ringtone, and tap OK.
Fo
3. Tap Vibrations, select a vibration type, and tap OK.
My device
2. At the Personalize call sound display, tap one of the
following options:
• Adapt sound: allows you to customize your sounds. Follow the
on-screen instructions to set up your personal call sound.
• Soft sound: plays a softer sound when the other party is in a
noisy environment.
• Clear sound: plays a clearer sound when the other party
sounds unclear or muffled.
• Off: turns off your customized call sound and plays the default
sounds.
Changing Your Settings
136
Noise reduction
Voicemail settings
This option helps to suppress background noise from your
side during a call.
Increase volume in pocket
This option increases the ringtone volume when the device is
in a pocket or a bag. It uses the proximity sensor to detect its
location.
䡲
From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
My device ➔ Call ➔ Increase volume in pocket to
create a checkmark and enable the feature.
My device
Voicemail service
2. Tap the Voice mail number field, backspace to erase the
digits, and enter a new voicemail number using the
keypad, then tap OK.
3. Tap OK.
Sound
1. From the Home screen, tap
My device ➔ Call ➔ Sound.
My device
Voicemail service provided by your carrier is the
default.
Fo
2. Tap My carrier to remove the carrier Voicemail service.
➔ Settings ➔
My device
2. Tap a ringtone to hear it played.
3.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
My device ➔ Call ➔ Voicemail Service.
137
My device
My device
nl
From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
My device ➔ Call ➔ Noise reduction to create a
checkmark and enable the feature.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
䡲
You can view or modify your voicemail number from this
menu.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
My device ➔ Call ➔ Voicemail settings.
Select a ringtone and tap OK.
Vibrate
This option allows you select vibration settings.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
My device ➔ Call.
My device
2. Tap Vibrate to create a checkmark and activate the
Vibrate feature.
TTY Mode
Blocking Mode
Your phone and TTY device will connect via a special cable
that plugs into your phone’s headset jack. If this cable was
not provided with your TTY device, contact your TTY device
manufacturer to purchase the connector cable.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
My device ➔ Call ➔ TTY mode.
My device
2. Tap TTY Full, TTY HCO, or TTY VCO. A green checkmark
will appear. Tap TTY Off to turn it off.
My device
2. In a single motion touch and slide the Blocking mode
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
Your phone is compatible with select TTY devices. Please
check with the manufacturer of your TTY device to ensure
that it is compatible with digital cell phones.
When Blocking mode is enabled, notifications for selected
features will be disabled. You will only receive notifications of
incoming calls from people on your allowed list.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
My device ➔ Blocking mode.
nl
A TTY (also known as a TDD or Text Telephone) is a
telecommunications device that allows people who are deaf,
hard of hearing, or who have speech or language disabilities,
to communicate by telephone.
slider to the right to turn it on
Confirm that the Blocking mode active icon
appears in the Status bar.
3. Place a green checkmark adjacent to those features
you would like to enable. Choose from: Disable
incoming calls, Disable notifications, Disable alarm and
timer, Disable LED indicator.
4. Configure a timeframe for these features to be active.
Remove the checkmark from the Always field to
Fo
configure the From and To time fields.
Changing Your Settings
138
5. Tap Allowed contacts to assign those contacts that are
Accessory Settings
exempted from these rules. Choose from None, All
This menu allows you to select the Audio output mode when
contacts, Favorites, or Custom. Allowed contacts will
using a car or desk dock.
1. From the Home screen, tap
My device ➔ Accessory.
➔ Settings ➔
My device
Power saving mode
2. Tap Dock sound to play sounds when inserting or
removing the phone from the dock.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
Power saving mode allows you to manage your phone to
conserve power.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
More ➔ Power saving mode.
nl
then appear in the Allowed contact list.
3. Tap Audio output mode to use the external dock
speakers when the phone is docked.
2. Tap the OFF / ON icon next to Power saving mode to turn
Power saving mode on
4. Tap Desk home screen display to display the desk home
screen whenever the phone is docked.
3. Tap the following options to create a checkmark and
conserve power:
• CPU power saving: allows you to limit the maximum
performance of the CPU.
5. Tap Automatic unlock if you are using a phone cover
and you want your phone to unlock when you open the
cover.
• Screen power saving: allows you to lower the screen power
level.
• Turn off haptic feedback: allows you to turn off vibration when
you tap or touch the screen.
139
Fo
4. Tap Learn about Power saving mode to learn about
various ways to conserve battery power.
6. Tap Audio output to set your Audio output to Stereo or
Surround.
Accessibility
Accessibility services are special features to make using the
device easier for those with certain physical disabilities. Use
the Accessibility settings to activate these services.
Note: You can download accessibility applications from Play
Store and manage their use here.
My device
• TalkBack: activate the TalkBack feature.
➔ Settings ➔
Note: TalkBack, when installed and enabled, speaks feedback
to help blind and low-vision users.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
2. The following options are available:
• Auto-rotate screen: automatically rotate the screen from
landscape to portrait when you rotate your phone.
nl
1. From the Home screen, tap
My device ➔ Accessibility.
• Manage accessibility: save and update your accessibility
settings or share them with another device. You can export your
settings, import a previously saved file, or share your file with
another device.
• Screen timeout: timeout the accessibility feature after a
defined amount of time.
• Secured lock time: allows you to set the time of inactivity that
passes before your screen locks.
Important! TalkBack can collect all of the text you enter,
except passwords, including personal data and
credit card numbers. It may also log your user
interface interactions with the device.
• Speak passwords: reads out password information.
• Answering/ending calls: accept incoming calls by pressing
the home key or end calls using the power key.
Fo
• Show shortcuts: allow the accessibility shortcut under the
device options to be used by pressing and holding the power
key.
• Font size: change the size of the fonts used on the device
within menus, options, etc. Choose from: Tiny, Small, Normal,
Large, or Huge.
• Magnification gestures: use exaggerated gestures such as
triple-tapping, double pinching, and dragging two fingers
across the screen.
Changing Your Settings
140
• Mono audio: allows you to enable stereo audio to be
compressed into a single mono audio stream for use with a
single earbud/earphone.
• Color adjustment: allows you to adjust the display colors if
you are color blind and have difficulty reading the display
because of the colors. Touch and slide the slider to the right to
turn it on
. Follow the on-screen instructions.
• Turn off all sounds: allows you to mute every sound made by
the device during taps, selections, notifications, etc.
• Accessibility shortcut: allows you to quickly enable
accessibility features in 2 quick steps. Touch and slide the
slider to the right to turn it on
. Follow the on-screen
instructions.
• Assistant menu: allows you to improve the device
accessibility for users with reduced dexterity. Touch and slide
the slider to the right to turn it on
. Follow the onscreen instructions.
• Text-to-speech options: allows you to adjust your text-tospeech settings. For more information, refer to “Speech
Settings” on page 146.
• Tap and hold delay: allows you to select a time interval for
this action. Choose from: Short, Medium, or Long.
• Negative colors: reverse the display of on-screen colors from
White text on a Black background to Black text on a White
background.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
nl
• Flash notification: allows you to set your camera light to blink
whenever you receive a notification.
• Enhance web accessibility: allows apps to install scripts
from Google that make their Web content more accessible. Tap
Allow.
141
Fo
• Sound balance: allows you to use the slider to set the Left
and Right balance when using a stereo device.
• Interaction control: allows you to enable or disable motions
and screen timeout. You can also block areas of the screen
from touch interaction. Touch and slide the slider to the right to
turn it on
. Follow the on-screen instructions.
Language and input
This menu allows you to configure the language in which to
display the menus. You can also set on-screen keyboard
options.
Google voice typing settings
Language
5. Based on your selection of input method, the
appropriate settings will appear and are explained
below.
2. Tap a language from the list.
Keyboards and Input Methods
nl
From this menu you can set Samsung keyboard options.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
My device ➔ Language and input.
You can change the keyboard used by your device by
following these steps:
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
My device ➔ Language and input.
My device
2. Tap the
icon next to Google voice typing.
3. The following options are available:
• Choose input languages: tap on a language that you want to
input. Select Automatic to use the local language or select a
language from the list.
My device
2. Tap Default and select a keyboard.
Select Samsung keyboard or Swype.
3. Tap Set up input methods.
My device
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
You can change the language used by your device by
following these steps:
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
My device ➔ Language and input ➔ Language.
• Block offensive words: tap to create a checkmark and enable
the blocking of recognized offensive words from the results of
your voice-input Google typing.
• Download offline speech recognition: Enables voice input
while offline.
Fo
icon next to the input method that you
4. Tap the
would like to configure the settings for.
Changing Your Settings
142
– Auto capitalization automatically capitalizes the first letter of
My device
by tapping the space bar twice when using the on-screen
QWERTY keyboard.
– Character preview provides an automatic preview of the
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
icon next to Samsung keyboard.
2. Tap the
• Portrait keyboard types allows you to choose a keyboard
configuration (Qwerty [default] or 3x4 Keyboard).
the first word in each sentence (standard English style).
– Auto spacing automatically inserts spaces between words.
– Auto-punctuate automatically inserts a full stop in a sentence
From this menu you can set Samsung keyboard options.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
My device ➔ Language and input.
nl
Samsung Keyboard settings
• Input languages sets the input language. Tap a language from
the available list. The keyboard is updated to the selected
language.
• Predictive text enables predictive text entry mode. This must
be enabled to gain access to the advanced settings. Touch and
hold to access the advanced settings. Touch and slide the slider
to the right to turn it on
• SwiftKey Flow allows you to type words by swiping between
on-screen keys.
• Cursor control allows you to move the cursor by sliding your
finger across the keyboard.
Fo
• Handwriting enables the device to recognize on-screen
handwriting and convert it to text.
• Advanced displays the following advanced options:
143
current character selection within the text string. This is helpful
when multiple characters are available within one key.
– Key-tap vibration enables vibration feedback when you tap an
on-screen key.
– Key-tap sound enables auditory feedback when you tap an
on-screen key.
• Help launches a brief on-screen tutorial covering the main
concepts related to the Samsung keyboard.
• Reset settings resets the keyboard settings back to their
original configuration.
Predictive Text Settings
icon next to Samsung keyboard.
Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the
Predictive text field, to turn it ON
4. Tap Predictive text.
• Privacy policy: click the link to read the privacy policy. Follow
the on-screen instructions.
Swype Keypad Settings
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
3.
• Clear personal data: removes all personalized data that you
have entered.
2. Tap the
My device
nl
From this menu you can set Predictive Text settings.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
My device ➔ Language and input.
• Clear remote data: deletes anonymous data that is stored on
the personalization server.
5. The following options are available:
• Personalized data: allows you to use personal language that
you have added to make your prediction results better.
To configure Swype settings:
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
My device ➔ Language and input.
2. Tap the
My device
icon next to Swype.
• Learn from Facebook: allows you to login to your Facebook
account so your phone can learn your Facebook style.
3. Tap How to Swype to view an on-screen manual for
Swype.
• Learn from Gmail: allows you to login to your Gmail account so
your phone can learn your Gmail style.
4. Tap Gestures to view helpful information on using
gestures while using Swype.
• Learn from Twitter: allows you to login to your Twitter account
so your phone can learn your Twitter style.
5. Tap Preferences to alter these settings:
• Vibrate on keypress: activates a vibration sensation as you
enter text using the keypad.
• Learn from Messaging: allows your device to learn from your
Messages.
Fo
• Learn from Contacts: allows your device to learn from your
Contacts.
• Sound on keypress: turns on sounds generated by the Swype
application.
• Show helpful tips: turns on a flashing indicator for quick help.
Changing Your Settings
144
• Contribute data usage: when enabled, allows the Nuance®
application to collect usage data for better word predictions.
• Cellular data: when enabled, activates cellular data usage by
the Swype application so it can receive program updates,
language downloads, and other related features via your
existing data connection.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
• Show complete trace: once enabled, sets wether or not to
display the complete Swype path.
• Backup & Sync: allows you to backup your Swype dictionary
and sync your Swype dictionary across multiple devices.
• Auto-capitalization: automatically capitalizes the first letter of
a sentence.
• Register now: allows you to register with Swype so you can
take advantage of backup and sync options.
nl
• Auto-spacing: automatically inserts a space between words.
When you finish a word, just lift your finger or stylus and start
the next word.
• Pop-up on keypress: once enabled, displays a character
above an on-screen key while typing.
• Next word prediction: once enabled, predicts the next word in
your text string based on your current text entries.
Note: If incorrect words are being entered as you type,
disabled this feature.
• Reset Swype’s dictionary: once enabled, deletes any words
you have added to Swype’s dictionary.
• Version: displays the software version information.
6. Tap Language Options to activate and select the current
text input language. Default language is US English.
145
Fo
7. Tap Swype Connect to activate and configure the
following data settings:
8. Tap Personalization to activate and configure the
following social media personalization settings.
• Edit Dictionary: allows you to edit your personal Swype
dictionary.
• Facebook: allows you to log into your current Facebook
account from where contact names are added to your Swype’s
personal dictionary for later use when you enter names into text
fields. Helps recognize familiar names.
• Twitter: allows you to sing into your existing Twitter account
from where names and words are added to your personal
dictionary. Helps recognize familiar names and words.
Speech Settings
• Bluetooth headset: allows you to record audio through a
Bluetooth headset if available.
3. Tap Text-to-speech options and select Google Text-tospeech Engine or Samsung text-to-speech engine.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
This menu allows you to set the speech settings for Voice
input.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
My device ➔ Language and input.
• Google Account dashboard: allows you to manage your
collected data.
9. Tap Updates to update the application if new software
is available.
• Personalized recognition: enables the improvement of
speech recognition accuracy.
nl
• Gmail: allows you to sign in to your existing Gmail account from
where existing contact information is added to your personal
dictionary. Helps recognize familiar names.
My device
2. Tap Voice search to configure the following:
• Language: Choose a language for your voice input.
• Speech output: Sets whether you will use speech output
always or only when using hands-free.
• Block offensive words: Enable or disable blocking of
recognized offensive words from the results of your voice-input
Google searches.
• Hotword detection: Enable to being able to launch voice
search by saying the word “Google”.
Fo
• Download offline speech recognition: Enables voice input
while offline.
4. Tap
next to the preferred TTS engine configure the
following settings:
• Language: allows you to set the language for spoken text.
• Settings for Google Text-to-speech Engine: allows you to
view Open Source Licenses.
• Settings for Samsung text-to-speech engine allows you to
view Open Source Licenses.
• Install voice data: allows you to install voice data for speech
synthesis.
5. Scroll down to the General section to access the
following options:
• Speech rate: Set the speed at which the text is spoken.
Changing Your Settings
146
• Listen to an example: Play a sample of speech synthesis
(available if voice data is installed).
The Motions and Gestures settings allow you to set up
various Motion activation services. For more information on
using gestures, see “Using Motions and Gestures” on
page 32.
䡲
From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
My device ➔ Motions and gestures.
Air gesture
My device
Fo
Air gesture allows you to control your device by performing
motions above the sensor.
1. From the Motions and gestures screen, tap Air gesture.
147
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
3. Tap OK to save your setting.
4. The following Air gesture features are available:
• Quick glance: when your screen is off, reach towards your
device and it will display information such as time, date, missed
calls, incoming messages, and battery strength. Tap the ON/
OFF icon
to turn it on.
nl
My device
2. Tap Pointer speed then drag the slider to the right to go
faster or to the left to go slower.
Motions and Gestures
at the top of your screen
3. Tap Learn about the sensor and icon to learn more about
the Air gesture sensor and its location.
Pointer speed
This option sets your Pointer speed.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
My device ➔ Language and input.
2. Tap the ON/OFF icon
to activate Air gesture.
• Air jump: move your hand up or down above the sensor to
jump to the top or bottom of a page or list. Tap the ON/OFF icon
to turn it on.
• Air browse: move your hand to the right or left above the
sensor to move to the previous or next item such as pictures or
web pages. Tap the ON/OFF icon
to turn it on.
• Air move: use one hand to press and hold an icon then move
your other hand to the left or to the right above the sensor to
move the icon to another page. You can also use this feature in
your calendar to move events to another day. Tap the ON/OFF
icon
to turn it on.
➔ Help for additional information.
2. Tap the ON/OFF icon
to activate Motion.
• Mute/pause: Once enabled, mute incoming calls and any
playing sounds by turning the device display down on a
surface. Tap the ON/OFF icon
to turn it on.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
Motion allows you to control your device by performing
natural movements.
1. From the Motions and gestures screen, tap Motion.
5. Press
Motion
• Browse an image: Once enabled, touch and hold a desired
on-screen image to pan around it. Move the device left or right
to pan vertically or up and down to pan horizontally. Tap the ON/
OFF icon
to turn it on.
nl
• Air call-accept: wave your hand above the sensor to accept an
incoming call. Tap the ON/OFF icon
to turn it on.
at the top of your screen
4. Press
➔ Help for additional information.
Palm motion
3. The following options are available:
• Direct call: Once enabled, the device will dial the currently
displayed on-screen Contact entry as soon as you place the
device to your ear. Tap the ON/OFF icon
to turn it on.
• Smart alert: Once enabled, pickup the device to be alerted and
notified of you have missed any calls or messages. Tap the ON/
OFF icon
to turn it on.
Fo
• Zoom: Once enabled, you must be on a screen where content
can be zoomed. In a single motion, touch and hold two points
on the display then tilt the tilt the device back and forth to zoom
in or out. Tap the ON/OFF icon
to turn it on.
Palm motion allows you to control your device by touching
your screen with the palm of your hand.
1. From the Motions and gestures screen, tap Palm
motion.
2. Tap the ON/OFF icon
to activate Palm motion.
at the top of your screen
3. The following options are available:
• Capture screen: Once enabled, you can capture any
on-screen information swiping across the screen. In a single
motion, press the side of your hand on the screen and swipe
form left to right. The image is then copied to the clipboard. Tap
the ON/OFF icon
to turn it on.
Changing Your Settings
148
➔ Help for additional information.
Gyroscope calibration allows you to calibrate motion
correctly using the device’s built-in gyroscope.
1. From the Motions and gestures screen, tap Gyroscope
calibration.
2. Place your device on a flat surface.
3. Tap Calibrate.
Fo
4. When finished, Calibrated will appear on your screen.
Tap
to return to the previous screen.
149
The Smart screen options allow you to customize your
screen settings to make the screen more responsive and
easier to use.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
My device ➔ Smart screen.
My device
2. Tap any of the following options to create a checkmark
and activate the features:
• Smart stay: disables the screen timeout if your phone detects
that your face is watching the screen.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
4. Press
Gyroscope calibration
Smart screen
nl
• Mute/pause: Once enabled, you can pause any on-screen
video or mute any current sound by simply covering the screen
with your hand. Once you remove your hand from the screen,
the device goes back to normal by either continuing to play the
current video or unmuting the current sound. Tap the ON/OFF
icon
to turn it on.
• Smart rotation: disables the auto screen rotation by checking
the orientation of your face and the device.
• Smart pause: pauses videos when your device detects that
your head has moved away from the screen.
3. Tap the ON/OFF icon
to the right of the Smart
scroll field to activate the feature. With Smart scroll,
the screen will scroll depending on the phone’s tilt
angle once your eyes have been detected.
2. Tap the ON/OFF icon
to activate Air view.
Voice control
The Voice control settings allow you to set up voice
commands to control your device.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
My device ➔ Voice control.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
My device
• Sound and haptic feedback: allows you to play sound and
feel vibration when you hover your finger over Air view items.
With the Air view feature, you can hover your finger over the
screen and Air view features will be displayed. For example,
you can hover your finger over a scheduled item in your
calendar to see more details.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
My device ➔ Air view.
• Webpage magnifier: allows you to see magnified links on
webpages when you hover your finger over them.
nl
Air view
at the top of your screen
3. The following options are available. Tap an option to
create a checkmark and activate the feature.
• Information preview: allows you to see information previews,
extended text, and enlarged images when you hover your
finger over the screen.
• Progress preview: allows you to preview a scene or show
elapsed time when you hover your finger over the progress bar
while watching a video.
Fo
• Speed dial preview: allows you to see the contacts and their
speed dial numbers when you hover your finger over them in
your contacts list.
2. Tap the ON/OFF icon
to activate Voice control.
My device
at the top of your screen
3. The following options are available. Tap an option to
create a checkmark and activate the feature.
• Incoming calls: allows you to answer or reject calls using the
commands Answer and Reject.
• ChatON: allows you to answer or reject calls using the
commands Answer and Reject.
• Alarm: allows you to stop or snooze an alarm by using the
commands Stop and Snooze.
• Camera: allows you to take pictures using the voice
commands Smile, Cheese, Capture, or Shoot.
Changing Your Settings
150
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
1. From a Home screen, tap
Accounts.
Add Account
This menu allows you to set up, manage, and synchronize
accounts, including your Google and email accounts.
➔ Settings ➔
2. Tap the account which is located in the My accounts
section.
3. Tap the account name.
Adding an Account
1. From a Home screen, tap
Accounts ➔ Add account.
2. Tap one of the account types.
➔ Settings ➔
3. Use the keyboard and follow the prompts to enter your
credentials and set up the account.
Fo
A green circle will appear next to the account type once
you have created an account. Your email account will
also be displayed in the My accounts section of the
main Accounts menu.
151
Important! Removing an account also deletes all of its
messages, contacts, and other data from the
device.
Note: If you set the alert type for calls or alarms to vibration,
voice control will not be available.
Removing an Account
nl
• Music: allows you to control your Music app using the voice
commands Next, Previous, Pause, Play, Volume Up, and
Volume Down.
4. At the bottom of the screen, tap Remove account, then
tap Remove account at the prompt to remove the
account and delete all its messages, contacts, and
other data.
Synchronizing Accounts
Select the items you want to synchronize on your account
such as Books, Calendar, Contacts, and more.
1. From a Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
Accounts.
2. Tap the account which is located in the My accounts
section.
3. Tap the account name.
Backup Account
6. Tap Account settings to access your account settings.
Back up and reset
The Back up and reset settings allow you to back up your
data, back up accounts, automatically restore your phone,
and reset your phone settings to the factory settings.
Back Up My Data
2. Tap Backup account and tap your Google Gmail account
or tap Add account to set your Google Gmail account to
be backed up to the Google server.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
7. Tap Storage usage to see your storage usage for
different applications.
5. Tap Cancel sync to stop the synchronization.
If you have enabled the Back up my data option, then the
Backup account option is available.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
Accounts ➔ Back up and reset.
nl
4. Tap Sync now to synchronize your account or only tap
the Sync items that you want to synchronize.
By setting this option, the Google server will back up all of
your settings and data.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
Accounts ➔ Back up and reset.
Fo
2. Tap Back up my data to enable or disable back up of
application data, WI-Fi passwords, and other settings
to the Google server.
Automatic Restore
By setting this option, when you reinstall an application, all of
your backed up settings and data will be restored.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
Accounts ➔ Back up and reset.
2. Tap Automatic restore to enable or disable automatic
restoration of settings from the Google server.
Factory Data Reset
From this menu you can reset your phone and sound settings
to the factory default settings.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
Accounts ➔ Back up and reset.
2. Tap Factory data reset.
Changing Your Settings
152
Location services
• My places: allows you to add location information for your
Home, Office, and Car.
Security
The Security settings allow you to determine the security
level for your phone.
Encryption
The Location services settings allow you to set up how the
phone will determine your location and the sensor settings
for your phone.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
More ➔ Location services.
Fo
2. Tap any of the following options to create a checkmark
and activate the service:
153
• Use wireless networks: allows applications to use data from
mobile networks and Wi-Fi to help determine your location.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
Warning! Performing a Factory data reset will erase all data
from your phone and internal SD card, including your
Google account, system and application data and
settings, and downloaded applications. It will not
erase current system software, bundled
applications, and external SD card files such as
music and photos.
• Use GPS satellites: allows applications to use GPS to pinpoint
your location.
3. Tap Reset device, then follow the prompts to perform
the reset.
• Access to my location: allows apps that have asked your
permission to use your location information. Tap the ON/OFF
icon
to turn it on.
nl
The Factory data reset screen displays reset
information.
To require a numeric PIN or password to decrypt your phone
each time you power it on or encrypt the data on your SD
card each time it is connected:
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
More ➔ Security.
2. You must first set up a screen lock type if you haven’t
already done so. For more information, refer to “Screen
Lock” on page 128.
4. Tap Encrypt external SD card to enable the encryption
on SD card data that requires a password be entered
each time the microSD card is connected.
When enabled, your phone will ask for a PIN number each
time you use the phone. Using this option you can also
change your SIM PIN number.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
More ➔ Security.
3. Tap Encrypt device. For more information, read the
displayed help screen.
Use this option to set up your password when one is first
required or change your current password.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
More ➔ Security ➔ Set up/change password.
2. Enter a new password and tap Confirm.
3. Enter the new password again and tap Confirm.
Set up SIM card lock
3. Tap Lock SIM card, enter your SIM PIN code, then tap
OK.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
Set up/change password
nl
2. Tap Set up SIM card lock.
Tip: Make sure your battery is charged more than 80 percent.
Encryption may take an hour or more.
Note: You must activate Lock SIM card before you can change
your SIM PIN code.
4. Tap Change SIM PIN.
5. Enter your old SIM PIN code and tap OK.
6. Enter your new SIM PIN code and tap OK.
7. Re-type your new SIM PIN code and tap OK.
Forgotten SIM PIN password
Fo
Prevent another user from using your SIM card to make
unauthorized calls or from accessing information stored on
your SIM card by protecting the information using a PIN code.
If you enter the wrong SIM PIN more than 3 times, you will
need to contact your AT&T Customer Service Representative
to get the PUK code for your device.
Changing Your Settings
154
4. Enter a new PIN code in the New PIN code field and tap
OK.
5. Enter the new PIN code again in the Confirm PIN code
field and tap OK.
Note: While your SIM PIN is locked, you will still be able to
make Emergency calls if necessary.
Make passwords visible
Fo
When enabled, password characters display briefly as you
touch them while entering passwords.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
More ➔ Security.
155
The Device Administration feature allows you to select one or
more administration applications that control your device for
security purposes (for example, if your phone is lost of
stolen). These applications enforce remote or local device
security policies.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
3. Enter the new PUK code that you received from your
AT&T Customer Service Representative in the PUK code
field.
Device Administrators
2. After the third incorrect attempt, the Type PUK and new
PIN code screen displays and your SIM card is locked.
2. Tap Make passwords visible to create a checkmark and
enable or disable the display of password characters.
nl
1. Each time you enter a wrong SIM PIN number the
phone will display how many attempts you have
remaining.
Some of the features a device administration application
might control are:
• Setting the number of failed password attempts before the
device is restored to factory settings.
• Automatically locking the device.
• Restoring factory settings on the device.
Note: If a device uses multiple enabled administration
applications, the strictest policy is enforced.
1. From the Home screen, tap
More ➔ Security.
2. Tap Device administrators.
➔ Settings ➔
2. Tap Unknown sources.
A check mark is displayed to indicate it is active.
Warning! Enabling this option causes your phone and personal
data to be more vulnerable to attack by applications
from unknown sources.
Verify apps
Fo
This feature allows you to either block or warn you before
installing apps that may cause harm to your phone.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
More ➔ Security.
2. Tap Verify apps.
2. Tap Trusted credentials.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
This feature allows you to download and install non-Market
applications.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
More ➔ Security.
If a certificate authority (CA) certificate gets compromised or
for some other reason you do not trust it, you can disable or
remove it.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
More ➔ Security.
Unknown sources
Trusted Credentials
nl
3. Select a device administrator and follow the prompts. If
no device administrators are listed, you can download
them from the Play Store.
The trusted credentials screen has two tabs:
• System: Displays CA certificates that are permanently installed
in the ROM of your device.
• User: Displays any CA certificates that you installed, for
example, in the process of installing a client certificate.
3. Tap a CA certificate to examine its details.
A scrolling screen displays the details.
4. Scroll to the bottom of the details screen and tap
Disable to disable a System certificate or Remove to
remove a User certificate.
A check mark is displayed to indicate it is active.
Changing Your Settings
156
When enabled, a check mark appears in the check box.
Install from device storage
Install encrypted certificates from an installed memory card.
Note: You must have installed a memory card containing
encrypted certificates to use this feature.
1. From the Home screen, tap
More ➔ Security.
➔ Settings ➔
Fo
2. Tap Install from device storage, then choose a
certificate and follow the prompts to install.
157
Clear stored credentials.
Note: This setting only appears if you have installed encrypted
certificates.
1. From the Home screen, tap
More ➔ Security.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
5. Tap OK to return to the certificate list.
Clear credentials
nl
Caution! When you disable a system CA certificate, the Disable
button changes to Enable, so you can enable the
certificate again, if necessary. When you remove a
user-installed CA certificate, it is permanently
deleted and must be re-installed, if needed.
➔ Settings ➔
2. Tap Clear credentials to remove all certificates.
Application Manager
You can download and install applications from Play Store or
create applications using the Android SDK and install them
on your device. Use Application manager settings to manage
applications.
Warning! Because this device can be configured with system
software not provided by or supported by Google or
any other company, end-users operate these devices
at their own risk.
The graph at the bottom of the Downloaded tab shows
used and free device memory. The graph at the bottom
of the Running tab shows used and free RAM.
Downloaded
5. Tap an application to view and update information
about the application, including memory usage, default
settings, and permissions.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
2. Tap Downloaded, Running, or All to display memory
usage for that category of applications.
Note: This will reset the preferences for disabled apps,
disabled app notifications, default applications for
actions, and background data restrictions for apps. You
will not lose any app data.
See how memory is being used by Downloaded or Running
applications.
1. From a Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
More ➔ Application manager.
nl
Memory Usage
Displays apps you have downloaded onto your device.
1. From a Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
More ➔ Application manager.
3. To switch the order of the lists displayed in the
Downloaded tabs, press
➔ Sort by size or Sort by
name.
Fo
View and control services running on your device.
1. From a Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
More ➔ Application manager.
2. Tap the Running tab. All the applications that are
currently running on the device display.
2. Tap the Downloaded tab to view a list of all the
downloaded applications on your device.
4. To reset your application preferences, press
Reset app preferences.
Running Services
➔
3. Tap Show cached processes to display all the cached
processes that are running. Tap Show services in use to
switch back.
4. Tap one of the applications to view application
information.
The following options display:
Changing Your Settings
158
Note: Options vary by application.
Battery
For more information about mounting or unmounting the SD
card, see “Memory Card” on page 48.
To view the memory allocation for your external SD card:
See how much battery power is used for device activities.
1. From a Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
More ➔ Battery.
The battery level displays in percentage. The amount
of time the battery was used also displays. Battery
usage displays in percentages per application.
Fo
2. Tap Screen, Android System, Android OS, Cell standby,
Media server, Device idle, or any other listed application
to view how it is affecting battery use.
159
From this menu you can view the memory allocation for the
memory card and USB as well as mount or unmount the SD
card.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
• Report: Report failure and other application information.
Storage
Warning! Not all services can be stopped. Stopping services
may have undesirable consequences on the
application or Android System.
Note: Other applications may be running that affect battery
use.
nl
• Stop: Stops the application from running on the device. This is
usually done prior to uninstalling the application.
䡲
From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
More ➔ Storage.The available memory displays under
the Total space and Available space headings for both
Device memory and SD card.
SD card
䡲
Tap Unmount SD card to unmount your SD card so that
you can safely remove it, then tap OK.
– or –
1. Tap Format SD card to format your SD card. This will
delete all data on your SD card including music, videos,
and photos.
2. Tap Format SD card again.
3. Tap Delete all to continue or press
to cancel.
5. Tap Set time and tap the up and down arrows to set the
Hour, Minute, and PM/AM, then tap Set.
6. Tap Select time zone, then tap a time zone.
7. Optional: Tap Use 24-hour format. If this is not selected
the phone automatically uses a 12-hour format.
nl
Note: The Format SD card option is only available when your
SD card is mounted.
8. Tap Select date format and tap the date format type.
About Device
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
Date and time
This menu allows you to change the current time and date
displayed.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
More ➔ Date and time.
2. Tap Automatic date and time to allow the network to set
the date and time.
3. Tap Automatic time zone to allow the network to set the
time zone.
Important! Deactivate Automatic date and time to manually set
the rest of the options.
This menu contains legal information, system tutorial
information, and other phone information such as the model
number, firmware version, baseband version, kernal version,
and software build number.
To access phone information:
1. From the Home screen, tap
More ➔ About device.
➔ Settings ➔
2. The following information displays:
• Software update: allows you to update your phone software, if
available. For more information, refer to “Software Update”
on page 161.
Fo
4. Tap Set date and tap the up and down arrows to set the
Month, Day, and Year then tap Set.
Changing Your Settings
160
y
• SELinux status: displays the status of SELinux. SELinux is a
set of security policies/modules which is applied to the device
to improve the overall security.
Note: Baseband, kernal and build numbers are usually used
for updates to the handset or support. For additional
information please contact your AT&T service
representative.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
• Legal information: This option displays information about
Open source licenses as well as Google legal information. This
information clearly provides copyright and distribution legal
information and facts as well as Google Terms of Service,
Terms of Service for Android-powered Phones, and much more
pertinent information as a reference. Read the information and
terms, then press
to return to the Settings menu.
• Build number: displays the software, build number.
nl
• Status: displays the Battery status, Battery level (percentage),
Network, Signal strength, Mobile network type, Service state,
Roaming status, Mobile network state, the phone number for
this device (My phone number), IMEI number, IMEISV number,
IP address, Wi-Fi MAC address, Bluetooth address, Serial
number, Up time, and Device status.
• Device name: displays the phone’s model name.
• Model number: displays the phone’s model number.
• Android version: displays the android version loaded on this
handset.
• Baseband version: displays the baseband version loaded on
this handset.
161
Fo
• Kernel version: displays the kernel version loaded on this
handset.
Software Update
The AT&T Software Update feature enables you to use your
phone to connect to the network and upload any new phone
software directly to your phone. The phone automatically
updates with the latest available software when you access
this option.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
More ➔ About device ➔ Software update.
2. Tap Check for updates.
3. At the AT&T Software update prompt, tap OK to
continue.
Fo
nl
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
5. When updating software, once the update file is
downloaded, you can delay the update on the start
screen by postponing it for a certain period of time. If
you want to resume the update before the selected
time, tap Continue update.
4. The phone automatically updates the software (if
available), otherwise, when the Current software is up
to date prompt is displayed, tap OK.
Changing Your Settings
162
Section 9: Connections
Accessing the Mobile Web
• Double tap: Quickly tap the screen twice on the web page to
To access the Browser:
䡲
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
The Browser is your access to the mobile web. This section
explains how to navigate the Browser and introduces you to
the basic features.
zoom in or out.
From the Home screen, tap Internet
The AT&T/YAHOO! mobile homepage displays.
Navigating with the Browser
1. To select an item, tap an entry.
in or out (use a pinching-in or pinching-out motion).
3. Sweep the screen left to right to move laterally across
a web page.
Fo
4. To return to a previous page, press
5. To move forward to a web page, press
• Pinching: Sweep in opposite directions at the same time to zoom
Browser Options
2. To scroll through a website, sweep the screen with
your finger in an up or down motion.
163
There are several ways to Zoom in and out on your browser
while in desktop view. After tapping on a link or article, use
one of these methods:
• Tilting: Tap and hold the screen at two points then tilt the device
back and forth to reduce or enlarge the screen. You must first
enable motion in the Settings section. For more information, refer
to “Motions and Gestures” on page 147.
Internet
Zooming in and out of the Browser
nl
This section describes the various connections your phone
can make including accessing the Internet with your
Browser, Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, and Connecting your PC.
1. From the home page, press
to access the
following options:
• Homepage: displays the home web page.
• New window: displays a new window so you can browse
multiple URLs. For more information, refer to “Adding and
Deleting Windows” on page 165.
• Save page: allows you to store the current page in memory so
that it can be read later even if you loose your Internet
connection. It is saved in your Saved pages folder.
• Settings: allows you to modify your web settings. For more
information, refer to “Browser Settings” on page 167.
• Help: allows you view additional information concerning the
Internet application
Enter a URL
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
• Share via: allows you to share the page using Bluetooth,
ChatON, Email, Flipboard, Gmail, Google, Google+, Messaging,
S Memo, or Wi-Fi Direct.
• Print: allows you to print the screen or web page on a
Samsung printer using Wi-Fi or Wi-Fi Direct.
• Add shortcut: allows you to add a shortcut to your Home
screen.
nl
• Add bookmark: allows you to add a URL to your bookmark list
• Find on page: allows you to search in the current page.
• Incognito mode: pages viewed in incognito mode won’t
appear within your browser history or search history, and no
traces (such as cookies) are left on your device. For more
information, refer to “Going Incognito” on page 165.
• Saved pages: contains web pages you have saved using the
Save page option.
• History: displays your browsing history.
Fo
• Desktop view: allows you to assign the browser to display the
current page in the desktop view (to closely mimic the display
as it would appear on a desktop computer).
• Brightness: allows you to set the screen brightness.
You can access a website quickly by entering the URL.
Websites are optimized for viewing on your phone.
To enter a URL and go to a particular website, follow these
steps:
1. Tap the URL field at the top of your screen.
2. Enter the URL using the on-screen keypad.
The website displays.
Search the Internet
To perform an internet search using keywords, follow these
steps:
1. Tap the Search bar at the top of the browser.
2. Enter the keyword(s) to search using the on-screen
keypad and tap
3. Tap a link to view the website.
Connections
164
A new browser window is opened.
3. Tap a window listing to open up that Internet window.
4. Tap
at the top right corner of the web page
thumbnail to delete the window.
Going Incognito
3. A new browser window displays.
To exit from the incognito window:
1. From your browser window, tap
(Windows).
2. Scroll across the available windows and locate the
incognito window. The incognito icon
appears in
the upper-left of the new browser window while you
are in this mode.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
2. Tap 2 (Windows) to see thumbnails of all open
windows.
➔ Incognito mode.
2. At the information prompt, tap OK.
You can have up to eight Internet windows open at one time.
To add a new window, follow these steps:
➔ New window.
1. From your browser, press
To add a new incognito window:
1. From your browser, press
nl
Adding and Deleting Windows
The incognito feature allows you to view Internet sites
outside of normal browsing. Pages viewed in this incognito
window won’t appear within your browser history or search
history, and no traces (such as cookies) are left on your
device.
Note: Any downloaded files will be preserved and will stay on your
device after you exit the incognito mode.
next to the incognito listing to delete this
3. Tap
window.
Using Bookmarks
While navigating a website, you can bookmark a site to
quickly and easily access it at a future time. The URLs
(website addresses) of the bookmarked sites are displayed in
the Bookmarks page. From the Bookmarks page you can
also view your Most visited websites and view your History.
(Bookmarks).
1. From the Home webpage, tap
165
Fo
The Bookmarks page is displayed.
2. Press
to display the following options:
• Create folder: Creates a new folder in which to store new
bookmarks.
• Set as homepage: Sets the bookmark to your new homepage.
Adding Bookmarks
1. From any webpage, tap
➔
2. Use the on-screen keypad to enter the Name, Address,
and Location.
• List/Thumbnail view: Select Thumbnail view (default) to view
a thumbnail of the webpage with the name listed, or select List
view to view a list of the bookmarks with Name and URL listed.
3. Tap Save.
• Change order: Rearranges the current bookmarks.
4. Saved to bookmarks will appear at the bottom of the
page.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
nl
• Delete: Erases selected bookmarks.
• Move to folder: Selected bookmarks are moved to a selected
folder.
3. Tap a bookmark to view the webpage, or touch and
hold a bookmark for the following options:
• Open in new window: Opens the webpage in a new window.
• Edit bookmark: Allows you to edit the name or URL of the
bookmark. For more information, refer to “Editing
Bookmarks” on page 166.
• Add shortcut: Adds a shortcut to the bookmarked webpage to
your phone’s Home screen.
• Share link: Allows you to share a URL address using many
different options.
Fo
• Delete bookmark: Allows you to delete a bookmark. For more
information, refer to “Deleting Bookmarks” on page 166.
Editing Bookmarks
1. From the Bookmarks page, tap and hold the bookmark
you want to edit.
2. Tap Edit bookmark.
3. Use the on-screen keypad to edit the Name, Address,
and Location.
4. Tap Save.
Deleting Bookmarks
1. From the Bookmarks page, tap and hold the bookmark
you want to delete.
2. Tap Delete bookmark.
3. At the Delete confirmation window, tap OK.
Connections
166
Emptying the Cookies
4.
2. Tap Cookies and site data to create a checkmark.
3. Tap Done.
Using your History
The History list provides you with a list of the most recently
visited websites. These entries can be used to return to
previously unmarked web pages.
➔ History.
1. From the Home webpage, press
A list of your most recently visited websites is
displayed with Name and URL address.
Fo
2. Tap on a category such as Today, Last 7 days, or Most
visited.
3. Tap any entry to display the webpage.
167
➔ Clear history to delete the History list.
Saving Pages
nl
You can save a page for future viewing without making it a
bookmark.
1. From the Home webpage, press
➔ Save page.
Page saved in Saved pages is displayed.
2. The web page is saved.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
A cookie is a small file which is placed on your phone by a
website during navigation. In addition to containing some
site-specific information, it can also contain some personal
information (such as a username and password) which can
pose a security risk if not properly managed. You can clear
these cookies from your phone at any time.
➔ Settings ➔
1. From the Home webpage, press
Privacy ➔ Delete personal data.
Press
Saved Pages
The Saved pages list provides you with a list of the websites
that you have saved.
➔ Saved pages.
1. From the Home webpage, press
A list of your saved webpages is displayed with their
Name. The webpages that have been visited the most
will appear at the top.
2. Tap any entry to display the webpage.
Browser Settings
To make adjustments in your browser settings, follow these
steps:
1. From the Home webpage, press ➔
➔ Settings.
2. The following options are available:
Accessibility:
• Auto fill forms: allows you to enter text to be used in your web
profile. Tap Add profile, then enter text for the Web form auto
fill.
• Force zoom: allows you to override the website’s request to
control zoom.
• Text encoding: adjusts the current text encoding.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
Privacy:
• Text scaling: allows you to preview the text size, scale the text
size using a slider bar, set the zoom amount on double tap, and
minimize the font size using a slider bar.
• Set homepage: Sets the current home page for the Web
browser.
nl
Basics:
• Search and URL suggestions: displays predictions of related
queries and popular websites in the address bar as you type.
• Fullscreen: allows you to use Fullscreen mode to hide the
status bar.
• Preload available links before opening: allows you improve
performance when loading pages.
• Text booster: allows you to view PC websites easily by
boosting the text size. Note: the layout may change as a result.
• Remember form data: Allows the device to store data from
any previously filled out forms. Remove the checkmark to
disable this function.
Content settings:
• Accept cookies: Allows sites, that require cookies, to save and
read cookies from your device.
• Enable location: Allows websites to request access to your
location.
• Delete personal data: allows you to delete all personal data
such as Browsing history, Cache, Cookies and site data,
Passwords, Auto-fill data, and Location access.
• Enable JavaScript: Enables Javascript for the current Web
page. Without this feature, some pages may not display
properly. Remove the checkmark to disable this function.
Fo
• Remember passwords: Stores usernames and passwords for
visited sites. Remove the checkmark to disable this function.
Connections
168
• Enable notifications: Allows website notifications. Select
Always on, On demand, or Off.
• Clear notifications: Deletes website notification access
information.
• Reset settings: Restores all settings to default.
Turning Wi-Fi On
• Preload webpages: Allows the browser to preload pages in
the background. You can set to Always, Only on Wi-Fi, and
Never.
By default, your device’s Wi-Fi feature is turned off. Turning
Wi-Fi on makes your device able to discover and connect to
compatible in-range WAPs.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
Connections ➔ Wi-Fi.
• Load images: Allows web page images to be loaded along
with the other text components of a loaded website.
2. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the Wi-Fi
field, to turn Wi-Fi ON
Bandwidth management:
Fo
• Open pages in overview: Displays an overview of newly
opened web pages.
169
Wi-Fi (short for "wireless fidelity"and sometimes referred to
as wifi) is a term used for certain types of Wireless Local
Area Networks (WLAN). These device types use an 802.11
wireless specification to transmit and receive wireless data.
Wi-Fi communication requires access to an existing and
accessible Wireless Access Point (WAP). These WAPs can
either be Open (unsecured) as within most Hot Spots, or
Secured (requiring knowledge of the Router name and
password).
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
• Website settings: View advanced settings for individual
websites.
About Wi-Fi
• Default storage: Allows you to set your default storage to
Device or Memory Card.
Wi-Fi
nl
• Block pop-ups: Prevents popup advertisement or windows
from appearing on-screen. Remove the checkmark to disable
this function.
➔ Settings ➔
The network names and security settings (Open
network or Secured with WEP) of detected Wi-Fi
networks are displayed in the Wi-Fi networks section.
Note: When you select an open network, you will be
automatically connected to the network.
3. Enter a wireless password if necessary.
Manually add your new network connection
1. From the Home screen, tap
Connections ➔ Wi-Fi.
2. Tap Add Wi-Fi network.
6. Tap Show advanced options, if you need to add
advanced options such as Proxy settings, IP settings,
or Key management.
7. Tap Connect to store the new information and connect
to your target WAP.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
2. Tap the network you want to connect to.
5. If secured, you will also need to enter your WAP’s
password.
1. From the Home screen, tap
Connections ➔ Wi-Fi.
nl
Connect to a Wi-Fi Network
➔ Settings ➔
3. Enter the Network SSID. This is the name of your
Wireless Access Point.
Fo
4. Tap the Security field and select a security option. This
must match the current security setting on your target
WAP.
Note: The next time your device connects to a previously
accessed or secured wireless network, you are not
prompted to enter the WAP key again, unless you reset
your device back to its factory default settings.
Turning Wi-Fi Off
1. From the Home screen, tap
Connections ➔ Wi-Fi.
➔ Settings ➔
2. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the Wi-Fi
field, to turn Wi-Fi OFF
Note: Use of wireless data connections such as Wi-Fi and
Bluetooth can cause an added drain to your battery and
reduce your use times.
Connections
170
➔ Settings ➔
2. Tap Scan.
All available Wi-Fi networks are displayed.
Wi-Fi Advanced Settings
The Advanced Wi-Fi menu allows you to set up many of your
device’s advanced Wi-Fi services.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
Connections ➔ Wi-Fi.
2. Press
Wi-Fi Status Indicators
➔ Advanced.
The following options are available:
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
The following icons show your Wi-Fi connection status at a
glance:
1. From the Home screen, tap
Connections ➔ Wi-Fi.
nl
Manually Scan for a Wi-Fi Network
• Network notification: alerts you when a new WAP is available.
Displays when Wi-Fi is connected, active, and
communicating with a Wireless Access Point
(WAP).
• Passpoint: allows you to connect to passpoint-enabled Wi-Fi
Access Points automatically. Touch and slide the slider to the
right to turn it on
Displays when there is a Wi-Fi access point
available but you are not connected to it. May also
display if there is a communication issue with the
target Wireless Access Point (WAP).
• Keep Wi-Fi on during sleep: allows you to specify when to
disconnect from Wi-Fi.
Displays when connected to another device using
Wi-Fi Direct. For more information, refer to “Wi-Fi
Direct” on page 172.
• Check for Internet service: Checks if Wi-Fi internet service is
available when connected to an AP (Access Point).
• Auto connect: allows you to be automatically connected to an
AT&T Wi-Fi Hotspot as soon as your phone detects it.
171
Fo
• MAC address: view your device’s MAC address, required
when connecting to some secured networks (not configurable).
• IP address: view your device’s IP address.
Note: See your service plan for applicable charges for Wi-Fi
Direct.
➔ Settings ➔
2. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the Wi-Fi
field, to turn Wi-Fi ON
3. At the bottom of the Wi-Fi screen, tap the Wi-Fi Direct
button.
4. Repeat steps 1 - 3 on the other device you want to
connect with. The steps on a different model of phone,
may be different.
5. On your phone, tap Scan.
Sharing Information with Connected Device
To share Videos, Photos, or other information with the
connected device, follow these steps:
1. View the information that you want to share. For
example, if you want to share a photo, find the photo in
your camera viewer or My Files folder, then tap the
Share, Share via, or Send via option.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
1. From the Home screen, tap
Connections ➔ Wi-Fi.
9. For additional information about Wi-Fi Direct, press
➔ Help.
Wi-Fi Direct allows device-to-device connections so you can
transfer large amounts of data over a Wi-Fi connection.
8. Once connected, the other device will show as
Connected in your list of Wi-Fi Direct devices and the
icon will display at the top of your screen.
nl
Wi-Fi Direct
The device scans for other Wi-Fi Direct devices.
6. Once the device you want to connect to is displayed,
tap on it.
Fo
7. The other device has 2 minutes to tap Accept for the
connection to be made.
2. Tap the Wi-Fi Direct option.
3. Tap the connected device name. For example,
Android_49ba.
4. Tap Done.
5. The file is transferred and the other device will receive
a screen notification that a Wi-Fi file has been
received. The file can be found in My Files ➔ All files
➔ Device storage in the ShareViaWifi folder.
Connections
172
2. The first time you access AT&T Smart Wi-Fi, you will
need to install it. Tap OK at the prompt.
3. Sign on to your Google account if you have not already
done so.
4. The Play Store displays the AT&T Smart Wi-Fi
application. Tap Update.
5.
Tap Accept & download.
6. Follow the on-screen instructions to use AT&T Wi-Fi.
Fo
For more information on how to use this application, go
to www.att.com/smartwifi.
173
S Beam
When S Beam is activated, you can beam files to another
NFC-capable device by holding the devices close together.
You can beam images and videos from your Gallery, music
files from your Music app, and more. For more information,
refer to “S Beam” on page 126.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
With AT&T Smart Wi-Fi, you can maximize your battery
performance, maximize your data, simplify access to AT&T
Hot Spots and Wi-Fi networks, automate your Wi-Fi
connections, and track your data use.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ AT&T Smart
Wi-Fi
NFC (Near Field Communication) allows data exchange when
you touch your device with another compatible device. This
is used for applications such as S Beam. To activate NFC on
your device, see “NFC” on page 125.
AT&T Smart Wi-Fi
NFC
nl
Note: Depending on the other device model, the prompts and
shared folder information may differ.
Bluetooth
About Bluetooth
Bluetooth is a short-range communications technology that
allows you to connect wirelessly to a number of Bluetooth
devices, such as headsets and hands-free car kits, and
Bluetooth-enabled handhelds, computers, printers, and
wireless devices. The Bluetooth communication range is
usually up to approximately 30 feet.
➔ Settings ➔
2. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the
Bluetooth field, to turn Bluetooth ON
appears within the Status area.
To turn Bluetooth off:
1. From the Home screen, tap
Connections.
Bluetooth devices
➔ Settings ➔
2. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the
Bluetooth field, to turn Bluetooth OFF
Bluetooth Status Indicators
• Setting your device’s visibility (or “discoverability”) for other
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
When active,
The Bluetooth settings menu allows you to set up many of
the characteristics of your device’s Bluetooth service,
including:
• Entering or changing the name your device uses for Bluetooth
communication and description
To turn Bluetooth on:
1. From the Home screen, tap
Connections.
Bluetooth Settings
nl
Turning Bluetooth On and Off
The following icons show your Bluetooth connection status
at a glance:
Displays when Bluetooth is active.
Fo
Displays when Bluetooth is connected (paired) and
communicating.
To access the Bluetooth Settings menu:
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
Connections.
2. Verify your Bluetooth is ON
3. Tap Bluetooth.
To change your Bluetooth name:
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
More ➔ About device ➔ Device name.
2. Use the keyboard to modify your device name and tap
OK.
To make your device visible:
1. From the Bluetooth settings page, press
Visibility time-out.
Connections
➔
174
• Making your device visible allows it to be detected by other
devices for pairing and communication.
➔
To scan for Bluetooth devices:
1. Verify your Bluetooth is active.
2. From the Bluetooth settings page, tap Scan to search
for visible external Bluetooth-compatible devices such
as headsets, devices, printers, and computers.
Pairing Bluetooth Devices
Once successfully paired to an external device,
appears within the Status area.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
From the Bluetooth settings page, press
Received files.
A list of all files received from Bluetooth is displayed.
The Bluetooth pairing process allows you to establish trusted
connections between your device and another Bluetooth
device. When you pair devices, they share a passkey,
allowing for fast, secure connections while bypassing the
discovery and authentication process.
Fo
To pair your device with another Bluetooth device:
1. Verify your Bluetooth is active.
175
4. Enter the passkey or PIN code, if needed, and tap OK.
5. The external device will then have to also accept the
connection and enter your device’s PIN code.
nl
To show received files:
䡲
3. Tap a device from the list to initiate pairing.
2. Select a time that you would like your device visibility
to time-out.
2. Tap Scan. Your device will display a list of discovered
in-range Bluetooth devices.
Note: Due to different specifications and features of other
Bluetooth-compatible devices, display and operations
may be different, and functions such as transfer or
exchange may not be possible with all Bluetooth
compatible devices.
Note: Pairing between two Bluetooth devices is a one-time
process. Once a pairing has been created, the devices
will continue to recognize their partnership and
exchange information without having to re-enter a
passcode again.
3. Tap Unpair to delete the paired device.
2. From the Bluetooth settings page, tap the previously
paired device (from the bottom of the page).
3. Tap OK to confirm disconnection.
Note: Disconnections are manually done but often occur
automatically if the paired device goes out of range of
your phone or it is powered off.
Deleting a paired device (unpair)
4. Tap Rename to change the name of the paired device.
5. Tap Call audio to enable or disable call audio from the
paired device.
6. Tap Media audio to enable or disable media audio from
the paired device.
Sending Contacts via Bluetooth
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
Disconnecting a paired device breaks the connection
between the device and your phone, but retains the
knowledge of the pairing. At a later point when you wish to
reconnect the device, there is no need to setup the
connection information again.
1. Verify your Bluetooth is active.
nl
Disconnecting a paired device
Deleting a device from your list removes its “connection
record” and upon reconnection would require that you reenter all the previous pairing information.
1. Verify your Bluetooth is active.
Fo
2. From the Bluetooth settings page, tap
next to the
previously paired device. This opens the connected
device’s menu options.
Depending on your paired devices’ settings and capabilities,
you may be able to send pictures, Contact information, or
other items using a Bluetooth connection.
Note: Prior to using this feature, Bluetooth must first be
enabled, and the recipient’s device must be visible.
1. Verify your Bluetooth is active.
2. From the Home screen, tap Contacts
3. Press
➔ Import/Export ➔ Share namecard via.
4. Tap each contact that you would like to send via
Bluetooth. A green checkmark will appear next to each
entry you select.
5. Tap Done.
6. Tap Bluetooth.
Connections
176
PC Connections
You can connect your device to a PC using your PC data
cable using various USB connection modes.
Storage: allows you to use the onboard storage capacity of
the phone to store and upload files. This option allows your
computer to detect the phone as a removable storage drive.
Kies: allows you to manage music, movies and photos. You
can also backup precious contacts and calendars, download
apps and podcasts and automatically upgrade device
firmware. Kies conveniently syncs your life across all your
devices.
Fo
Note: To sync your device to your PC, it is highly
recommended that you install Samsung Kies which is
available at http://www.samsung.com/kies (for Windows/
Mac).
177
Connecting as a Storage Device
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
8. A Bluetooth share notification will appear in your
notifications list.
Note: If you are a Windows XP user, ensure that you have
Windows XP Service Pack 3 or higher installed on your
computer. Also, ensure that you have Samsung Kies 2.0
or Windows Media Player 10 or higher installed on your
computer.
Note: The external Bluetooth device must be visible and
communicating for the pairing to be successful.
nl
7. Select the paired device to send the contacts to.
You can connect your device to a PC as a removable disk and
access the file directory. If you insert a memory card in the
device, you can also access the files directory from the
memory card by using the device as a memory card reader.
Note: The file directory of the memory card displays as a
removable disk, separate from the internal memory.
1. Connect the USB cable to the device and connect the
cable to the computer. After a few seconds, a pop-up
window displays on the PC when connected.
2. On the PC pop-up, click Open device to view files.
3. Copy files from the PC to the memory card.
Section 10: Applications
AT&T DriveMode
nl
With the AT&T DriveMode application, you can set your
phone to auto reply when you are driving and don’t want to
answer the phone. You can set auto reply to Messages,
Emails, and Phone Calls. You can also allow up to five of your
contacts to contact you while you are in Drive mode.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ AT&T DriveMode
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
This section contains a description of each application that is
available in the Apps Menu, its function, and how to navigate
through that particular application. If the application is
already described in another section of this user manual,
then a cross reference to that particular section is provided.
Note: This manual only addresses applications that have been
loaded on your device as of the date of purchase.
Information concerning third party applications that you
may choose to download from the Google Play Store or
otherwise should be obtained from the application
provider directly and not from Samsung.
The AT&T DriveMode screen is displayed.
2. Read the Terms and Conditions and Privacy Policy and
tap Accept to continue.
3. Read the additional information and tap Continue.
Fo
Tip: To open applications quickly, add the icons of frequentlyused applications to one of the Home screens. For details,
see “Customizing Your Home Screen” on page 40.
4. Follow the on-screen instructions to set up your AT&T
DriveMode options.
AT&T FamilyMap
AT&T FamilyMap provides peace of mind by being able to
conveniently locate a family member from your wireless
phone or PC and know that your family's location information
is secure and private.
Applications
178
Note: The first time you use AT&T Family Map, you will need to
download the application from the Play Store. For more
information, refer to “Play Store” on page 194.
2. At the AT&T FamilyMap Sign In webpage, tap Get
Started to create an account.
– or –
Tap Sign In if you already have an account.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions.
AT&T Locker
Fo
AT&T Locker allows you to store, share, and sync all of your
photos, videos, and documents in one safe, convenient
place; the AT&T cloud. For more information, refer to “AT&T
Locker” on page 86.
179
➔ AT&T FamilyMap
AT&T Navigator provides you with access to real-time GPSdriven applications. These programs not only allow you to
achieve turn-by-turn navigation, but also access local
searches.
Important! You must have a data plan to use this feature.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
1. From the Home screen, tap
AT&T Navigator
nl
Note: FamilyMap requires a paid subscription. To sign up for
service, visit http://www.att.com/familymap for more
information or contact your AT&T Customer Service
Representative.
Note: These services require the purchase of a subscription.
To launch the AT&T Navigator application, follow these steps:
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ AT&T Navigator
2. Read the Terms of Service and tap Accept to
acknowledge the terms of use.
The first time that you use AT&T Navigator, the
necessary files will be downloaded. The AT&T
Navigator main screen displays.
3. Tap an AT&T Navigator plan that you choose to
purchase.
4. Follow the on-screen instructions.
Calculator
9. Turn your phone sideways to the landscape position to
display the scientific calculator.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
2. Enter the first number using the on-screen numeric
keys.
3. Enter the operation for your calculation by tapping the
corresponding on-screen arithmetic function key.
4. Enter the second number.
5. To view the result, tap equals (=).
Fo
located at the
6. To view calculator history, tap
top of the calculator buttons. A history of your past
calculations is displayed. Tap
again to display
the calculator keypad.
➔ Text size. Tap
8. To change the text size, press
Small, Medium, or Large.
Calendar
With this feature, you can use the phone as a calculator. The
calculator provides the basic arithmetic functions; addition,
subtraction, multiplication, and division. The Calculator also
keeps a history of recent calculations.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Calculator
➔ Clear
With AT&T Smart Wi-Fi, you can maximize your battery
performance, maximize your data, simplify access to AT&T
Hot Spots and Wi-Fi networks, automate your Wi-Fi
connections, and track your data use. For more information,
refer to “AT&T Smart Wi-Fi” on page 173.
7. To clear the calculator history, press
history.
nl
AT&T Smart Wi-Fi
With the Calendar feature, you can consult the calendar by
day, week, or month, create events, and set an alarm to act
as a reminder, if necessary.
To access the Calendar:
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Calendar
2. The following tabs are available on the right side of the
display:
• Year: displays the Year view.
• Month: displays the Month view.
• Week: displays the Week view.
• Day: displays the Day view.
• List: displays the List view.
• Task: allows you to search for tasks.
Applications
180
3. Tap
event.
(Create event) to create a new Calendar
3. Tap First day of week and select either Local default,
Saturday, Sunday or Monday.
4. Tap Hide declined events to activate this option. A check
mark indicates selection.
5. Tap Calendars to select the calendar options that you
want displayed.
5. Tap Lock time zone (to lock event time based on your
current user-selected time zone). Select a time zone
from within the Select time zone field.
• Delete: allows you to delete All events, All events before today,
or an individual event.
• Search: allows you to search within your current events.
• Sync: allows you to synchronize your calendar with one or all of
your accounts. This option only appears when an account has
been opened.
• Settings: displays a list of configurable settings.
Calendar Settings
1. From any Calendar view, press
➔ Settings.
Fo
2. Tap View styles and select an option.
• Tap Month view styles and select an option.
• Tap Week view and select a type.
181
nl
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
6. Press
and select one of the following options:
• Go to: displays a specific date.
4. Tap Today to display the current date indicated by a
blue box.
6. Tap Show week number to display the week numbers
along the side of the week entries.
7. Tap Calendars and select the type of general
synchronization settings you want. A check mark
indicates selection.
8. Tap Set alerts & notifications to adjust the event
notification method. Choose from: Alert, Status bar
notification, and Off.
9. Tap Select ringtone to assign a ringtone to a calendar
event notification.
10. Tap Vibration to set the Event notification tone to
vibrate.
11. Tap Quick responses to select quick responses to
emailing guests.
Camera
Use your 13.0 megapixel camera feature to produce photos in a
JPEG format. Your phone also functions as a Camcorder to take
videos. For more information, refer to “Camera” on page 95.
The Clock application allows you to access alarms, view the
World Clock, set a stopwatch, and use a timer.
nl
Alarm
This feature allows you to set an alarm to ring at a specific
time.
➔
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Clock
Alarm ➔ Create alarm
. The following options
display:
• Time: tap
(Up) or
(Down) to set the new time for the
alarm to sound. Tap AM or PM.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
With the ChatON application, you can interact with friends
and family with text, images, hand-written notes and video
shared instantly. You can chat in groups, while a Web client
will allow the easy sharing of content and conversations
between your phone and PC. For more information, refer to
“ChatON” on page 117.
Chrome
Clock
ChatON
4. Follow the on-screen instructions to use Google
Chrome.
The Google Chrome app allows you to use the Google
Chrome web browser on your phone.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Chrome
2. Read the Google Chrome Terms of Service and tap
Accept and Continue.
Fo
3. If you have an existing Chrome account, tap Sign in to
bring your open tabs, bookmarks, and omnibox data
from your computer to your phone, otherwise tap No
thanks.
• Alarm repeat: use this option to set the repeating status for the
alarm by tapping on the days that you want the alarm to sound.
Tap the Repeat weekly checkbox to have the alarm repeat
weekly.
• Alarm type: sets the way in which the alarm sounds when
activated (Melody, Vibration, Vibration and melody, and
Briefing).
• More: displays the following additional options:
Applications
182
– Alarm volume: drag the slider to adjust the alarm’s volume.
– Location alarm: when activated, the alarm only sounds
䡲
To stop an alarm when it sounds, touch and sweep the
icon to the right.
Setting the Snooze Feature
䡲
To activate the Snooze feature after an alarm sounds,
touch and sweep the ZZ icon to the left. Snooze must
first be set in the alarm settings. For more information,
refer to “Alarm” on page 182.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
when you are at a specific location. Touch and slide the
slider to the right to turn it on
then follow the onscreen instructions to enter a location.
Turning Off an Alarm
alarm is activated. Select an option or tap Add for additional
options.
nl
– Alarm tone: sets the sound file which is played when the
– Snooze: use this option to set a Duration (3, 5, 10, 15, or 30
Minutes) and Snooze repeat (1, 2, 3, 5, or 10 Times). Tap
the ON/OFF slider to activate.
– Smart alarm: tracks body movements and calculates the
best time for sounding the alarm. Place the phone
somewhere on your bed then the phone's movement sensor
(also known as accelerometer) is sensitive enough to work
from any part of the bed. Set the Interval and the Tone. Tap
the ON/OFF slider to activate.
– Name: allows you to use a specific name for the alarm. The
name will appear on the display when the alarm activates.
183
Fo
2. Tap Save to store the alarm details.
Deleting Alarms
To delete an alarm, follow these steps:
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Clock
Alarm ➔
➔ Delete.
➔
2. Tap the alarm or alarms you wish to delete. A green
checkmark will appear next to each selection. Tap
Select all to delete all alarms.
3. Tap Delete.
World Clock
World Clock allows you to view the time of day or night in
other parts of the world. World Clock displays time in
hundreds of different cities, within all 24 time zones around
the world.
3. Scroll through the list of cities to find the city you want
to add, or tap the Search bar and use the keypad to
enter a city to search for.
5. To set Daylight Savings time, press and hold a city,
then tap DST settings.
6. Select Automatic, Off, or 1 hour.
2. Tap Start to start the stopwatch and tap Lap to mark a
unit of time per lap.
3. Tap Stop to stop the stopwatch.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
4. Tap the city you want to add. The clock for that city will
display.
You can use this option to measure intervals of time.
➔
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Clock
Stopwatch.
2. Tap Add city to add another city to the World Clock.
Stopwatch
nl
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Clock
➔
World Clock. The clock for your time zone is displayed.
4. Tap Restart to continue or tap Reset to erase all times
recorded.
Timer
➔
You can use this option to set a countdown timer. Use a timer
to count down to an event based on a preset time length
(hours, minutes, and seconds).
➔
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Clock
Timer.
2. Press and hold the city clocks you wish to delete.
2. The Minutes field is highlighted and set to 1 minute.
Use the keypad to set the number of minutes you want.
7. If Daylight Savings Time is selected, a sun symbol on
the World Clock listing will appear.
Deleting a World Clock Entry
1. From the Home screen, tap
World Clock ➔
➔ Delete.
3. Tap the Hours field to set hours if desired. As you tap
different fields, they will become highlighted.
Fo
3. Tap Delete.
➔ Clock
4. Tap the Seconds field to set seconds.
Applications
184
5. Tap Start to begin the timer and tap Stop to pause the
timer.
6. After stopping, tap Restart to continue or tap Reset to
set the timer back to the original setting.
The default Desk clock is displayed.
to display the Desk clock in full-screen mode.
3. To make changes, tap
➔ Settings.
4. The following options are displayed while in full-screen
mode:
• Hide status bar: when this is checked, the status bar is hidden
from view.
• Wallpaper: tap to select Desk clock wallpaper from Default,
Gallery, or Same as home screen.
Fo
• Calendar: when this is checked, the calendar is displayed. Tap
to uncheck.
185
nl
Contacts
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
You can use the Desk clock when you have a desk dock and
you want your phone to display the time, day, date, location,
and weather conditions when it is docked.
➔
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Clock
Desk clock.
2. Tap
• Dock: allows you to set your Dock settings such as Dock
sound, Audio output mode, Desk home screen display,
Automatic unlock, and Audio output.
Desk clock
• Weather: when this is activated, the location, temperature, and
weather condition is displayed. Touch and slide the slider to the
right to turn it on
You can manage your daily contacts by storing their name
and number in your Address Book. Address Book entries can
be sorted by name, entry, or group.
You can also synchronize your phone Address Book with
AT&T Address Book, the network backup service.
For more information, refer to “Contacts and Your Address
Book” on page 68.
Downloads
Provides quick access to tabs containing a list of your current
downloaded files (Internet and Other).
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Downloads
All of your downloads are listed.
2. Tap an available file and select it for use.
Flipboard
Gmail
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
Email enables you to review and create email using various
email services. You can also receive message alerts when
you receive an important email. For more information, refer
to “Using Email” on page 111.
The Gallery is where you view photos and play back videos.
For photos, you can also perform basic editing tasks, view a
slideshow, set photos as wallpaper or contact image, and
share as a picture message. For more information, refer to
“Gallery” on page 92.
Email
Gallery
nl
3. Choose an available action such as Share, Delete, Sort
by size, or Clear list.
This application creates a personalized digital magazine out
of everything being shared with you. Access news stories,
personal feeds and other related material. Flip through your
Facebook newsfeed, tweets from your Twitter account,
photos from friends and much more.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Flipboard
2. Swipe up on the Flipboard screen, then tap Flipboard
Account at the top of the display.
3. Tap Create to set up a new Flipboard account.
– or –
Tap Sign In to log into your previously created profile.
Fo
4. Follow the on-screen instructions to use Flipboard.
Gmail is a web-based email service. Gmail is configured
when you first set up your phone. Depending on your
synchronization settings, Gmail can automatically
synchronize with your Gmail account on the web. For more
information, refer to “Using Gmail” on page 113.
Google
The Google Search application is the same on-screen
Internet search engine that is on the Google Search Bar on
your main Home screen. For more information, refer to
“Google Search Bar” on page 31.
Google +
Google+ makes messaging and sharing with your friends a
lot easier. You can set up Circles of friends, visit the Stream
to get updates from your Circles, use Messenger for fast
messaging with everyone in your Circles, or use Instant
Applications
186
2. The first time you access Group Play, read the
Disclaimer and tap OK.
The Group Play main screen is displayed.
Creating a group
If you have media you want to share, create a group.
1. From the Group Play main screen, if you want to set a
group password, tap the Set group password checkbox.
2. Tap Create group.
Fo
187
7. Press
➔ Info for information on the device that is
hosting the Mobile AP.
8. Press
➔ Help for additional information.
Joining a group
If you want to see media from your friend’s phone, join a
group.
1. From the Group Play main screen, tap Join group.
2. Your phone scans for available groups for you to join.
3. Tap a group to join.
You will now be able to see your group’s shared media.
3. If you selected the Set group password checkbox in
step 1, enter a group password at the Set group
password prompt, and tap OK.
Mobile AP is enabled.
6. Have your friends sign onto Group Play from their
devices and they can view your media using you as a
Mobile AP.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
Group Play allows you to share pictures, music, and
documents in real-time with your friends. You can create a
group from your device or join other groups. You can also
play games with your friends.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Group Play
5. Tap the items you want to share to create a
checkmark, then tap Done or OK.
Group Play
4. Tap one of the media items listed under the Share and
play content heading.
nl
Upload to automatically upload videos and photos to your
own private album on Google+. For more information, refer
to “Google +” on page 115.
4. Press
➔ Info for information on the device that is
hosting the Mobile AP.
Internet
Local
Local is an application that uses Google Maps and your
location to help you find Restaurants, Cafes, Bars,
Attractions, and other businesses. You can also add your own
locations.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Local
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
2. Tap one of the following for more information:
• New features: provides help on all of the new features and
applications such as Motion, Camera, Group Play, Story Album,
and S Health.
Open the web browser to start surfing the web. The browser
is fully optimized and comes with advanced functionality to
enhance the Internet browsing feature on your phone. For
more information, refer to “Internet” on page 163.
The Help application provides detailed help for using your
phone and the included features and applications.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Help
nl
Help
• Basics: provides basic information on using your device.
• Applications: provides information on how to use basic
applications like Contacts, Email, S Memo, Internet, Camera,
etc.
• Settings: provides information on settings for Wi-Fi, Bluetooth,
Ringtone, Power saving mode, NFC, Air gesture, Air view,
Smart screen, Motion, and Screen Mirroring.
• Online help: provides more detailed online help for additional
questions you may have.
Fo
• Available accessories: provides information on accessories
for your phone that are available for purchase.
2. Tap on one of the business categories to search for a
particular business.
All of the business categories that are close to you will
be displayed.
3. Tap on a business that you want to see the details for.
4. The business details such as address, phone, website,
and location are displayed. You can also see reviews
from around the web and from Google users.
Applications
188
Enabling a Location Source
Before you use Google Maps and find your location or search
for places of interest, you must enable a location source. To
enable the location source you must enable the wireless
network, or enable the GPS satellites.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
More ➔ Location services.
Fo
2. Tap the Use GPS satellites field. A green checkmark will
display next to the field.
189
To receive better GPS signals, avoid using your device in the
following conditions:
• inside a building or between buildings
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
Important! Before using Google Maps you must have at least
an active data (3G) connection. The Maps
application does not cover every country or city.
Note: Selecting Use GPS satellites allows you to locate places
of interest at the street-level. However, this also requires
a clear view of the sky and uses more battery power.
Depending on your location, you can view basic, custom, and
satellite maps and local business information, including
locations, contact information, and driving directions. You
can also post public messages about a location and track
your friends.
nl
Maps
• in a tunnel or underground passage
• in poor weather
• around high-voltage or electromagnetic fields
• in a vehicle with tinted windows
Using Maps
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Maps
A map will display with your location in the very center.
2. Follow the on-screen instructions to use the Maps
application.
Messages
The AT&T Messages app brings your texts, calls, and
voicemail messages together into a single conversation
thread and is accessible by phone or computer. For more
information, refer to “Messages App” on page 116.
My Files
Messenger
Mobile Hotspot
This application allows you to share your phones’s mobile
data connection via USB or as a portable Wi-Fi hotspot. For
more information, refer to “Tethering & portable hotspot” on
page 123.
Mobile TV
Mobile TV is a subscription service that allows you to watch
your favorite TV shows using your handset. For more
information, refer to “Mobile TV” on page 90.
Music
2. Tap Device storage to see the contents of your internal
SD card.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
Messenger allows you to bring groups of friends together into
a simple group conversation. When you get a new
conversation in Messenger, Google+ sends an update to your
phone. For more information, refer to “Messenger” on page
115.
My Files allows you to manage your sounds, images, videos,
bluetooth files, Android files, and other memory card data in
one convenient location.
➔ All
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ My Files
files.
You can send and receive different types of messages. For
more information, refer to “Messaging” on page 103.
nl
Messaging
3. The following folders may display:
• Alarms: this folder contains any alarm files you may have.
• Android: the Android folder stores files that are used in Android
applications.
• Application: this folder contains app info for S Memo.
• Bluetooth: this folder stores files sent via a Bluetooth device.
• DCIM: this is the default location for pictures and videos taken
by the device. Tap DCIM ➔ Camera to view the picture or
video files. For more information, refer to “Viewing Pictures”
on page 93. Also, see “Viewing Videos” on page 93.
• Download: this folder contains downloads you have made.
Fo
Music allows you to play music files that you have stored on
your phone and memory card. You can also create playlists.
For more information, refer to “Music” on page 87.
• Movies: this folder contains your Video and Movie files.
• Music: this folder contains your Music files.
Applications
190
• Notifications: this folder contains all of the notifications you
have received.
• Ringtones: this folder contains any ringtones you have
purchased.
Initial Setup
Note: Different folders may appear depending on how your
phone is configured.
4. If you have an external SD card inserted, tap SD
memory card to see the contents of your external SD
card (memory card).
myAT&T
➔ myAT&T
2. Sign into your Google Account. If you haven’t set up an
account, see “Creating a New Google Account” on
page 14.
3. After signing into your Google Account, the Play Store
displays the myAT&T application. Tap the application.
4. Tap Update.
5. Follow the on-screen instructions.
Fo
The myAT&T application allows you to manage your own
AT&T account. You can review and pay your bill, check
minutes and data usage, upgrade to a new device, or change
your rate plan.
191
1. From the Home screen, tap
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
• S Memo: this folder contains all the S Memos you have written.
nl
• Pictures: this folder contains your photos.
• Podcasts: this folder contains all of your podcasts.
Note: The first time you use myAT&T, you will need to
download the updated application from the Play Store.
When the Play Store page displays, tap Update. For more
information, refer to “Play Store” on page 194.
Using myAT&T
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ myAT&T
The myAT&T page is displayed.
2. Read the Terms and Conditions and tap Accept to
continue.
3. Enter your User ID and Password using the on-screen
keypad, then tap Login.
4. Follow the on-screen instructions.
• Type destination: allows you to use the keypad to enter your
destination.
To receive better GPS signals, avoid using your device in the
following conditions:
• inside a building or between buildings
1. From the Home screen, tap
• Recent Destinations: allows you to access information on
previous destinations you have used. This option only appears
after you have entered one or more destinations.
➔ Navigation
2. Read the Navigation information page and tap Accept
to continue or Don’t accept to exit.
3. Select one of the following options:
• Speak destination: allows you to speak your destination.
Fo
4. Follow the on-screen instructions.
Obtaining Driving Directions
• in a tunnel or underground passage
• in poor weather
• around high-voltage or electromagnetic fields
• in a vehicle with tinted windows
Launching Navigation
• Map: takes you to the map location of your present location
using GPS.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
Note: For voice-guided navigation, you need to install text-tospeech support from the Play Store.
• Go home: takes you to your home address. The first time you
are prompted to enter it.
Navigation is an internet-connected GPS navigation system
with voice guidance. You can type or speak your destination.
nl
Navigation
Your phone’s built-in GPS hardware allows you to get realtime driving directions to selected locations or
establishments based on your current location.
Using a Physical Address
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Navigation .
2. Tap either Speak Destination or Type Destination.
3. If typing in the address, enter the address, City, and
State using the keypad. As you type, possible
addresses will be displayed. Tap on one when you see
the address you want.
Applications
192
5. As you drive the route display will be updated and you
will receive voice-guided navigation directions.
6. Tap
for additional options.
Optical Reader
The Optical reader allows you to use your camera to identify
text and extract useful information.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Optical Reader
Fo
2. Aim the camera at an object containing written words.
193
The Phone application allows you to access the dialer
keypad, call logs, and favorites. For more information, refer
to “Call Functions” on page 50.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
Note: You will need to be signed on to your Google account
before downloading applications from the Play Store. For
more information, refer to “Creating a New Google
Account” on page 14.
Phone
4. If speaking the address, the Voice guidance screen is
displayed. For voice-guided navigation you need to
install text-to-speech support from the Play Store. Tap
Install to install the application or tap Skip to exit.
3. Align the on-screen box atop the target text. Once
detected, the device shows on-screen information
such as link and descriptions.
nl
The route will be displayed.
Play Books
With Google Play Books, you can find more than 3 million
free e-books and hundreds of thousands more to buy in the
eBookstore.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Play Books
2. Log on to your Google account. For more information,
refer to “Creating a New Google Account” on page 14.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions for using the Play
Books application.
Play Magazines
With Google Play Magazines, you can subscribe to your
favorite magazines and have them available to read on your
phone at any time or any place.
2. Log on to your Google account if you have not already
done so. For more information, refer to “Creating a
New Google Account” on page 14.
to
4. Read the Google Play Terms of Service and tap Accept.
5. Sweep the screen to the left or right to view
Categories, Featured, Top Selling, and New Arrivals.
6. Tap a magazine to see more information and
subscribe.
7. Follow the on-screen instructions to subscribe to a
magazine.
Play Movies & TV
With Google Play Music, you can play music that you have
added to your music file as well as any music you copied
from your PC. While offline, you can listen to music you have
copied from your PC. For more information, refer to “Google
Play Music” on page 90.
Play Store
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
3. At the Welcome! display, tap the shop icon
browse the full catalog.
Play Music
➔ Play Magazines
nl
1. From the Home screen, tap
Fo
With Google Play Movies & TV, you can rent thousands of
different movies and television shows. You can watch
instantly, or download your movie or show for offline viewing
at a later time. For more information, refer to “Play Movies &
TV” on page 92.
Play Store provides access to downloadable applications and
games to install on your phone. Play Store also allows you to
provide feedback and comments about an application, or flag
an application that might be incompatible with your phone.
Before using the Play Store you must have a Google Account.
For more information, refer to “Using Gmail” on page 113.
1. From the main Home screen, tap Play Store
2. Sign in to your Google account.
3. The first time you sign in, the Play Store Terms of
Service will be displayed. Tap Accept to continue or
Decline to exit.
4. Tap Apps, Games, or AT&T to download or purchase
games or applications. You can also download updates
to existing applications.
5. Follow on the on-screen instructions.
Applications
194
2. Enter your Email information (if desired) and touch
Register to complete the process.
– or –
Touch Skip to ignore this registration.
The main POLARIS Office 5 screen displays.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions to use POLARIS
Office 5.
S Health
Fo
S Health is a wellness application that allows you to better
manage your health by providing you with relevant
information.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ S Health
2. Read the introduction and tap Next.
195
4. Tap the Agree checkbox in all 3 sections.
5. Tap Next.
6. Enter your personal information, then tap Start.
7. Follow the on-screen instructions to use S Health.
8. Tap
➔ Help for more detailed information.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
POLARIS Office Mobile for Android is a Microsoft Office
compatible office suite. This application provides a central
place for managing your documents online or offline. The
application can also open Adobe PDF (Portable Document
Format) files.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ POLORIS Office 5
3. Read the Use of S Health, Connection Third Party
Devices and Programs, and Information Used.
®
nl
POLARIS Office 5
S Memo
The S Memo application allows you to create memos using
the keypad, your finger, or both. You can add images, voice
recordings, and text all in one place.
Creating a New Memo
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ S Memo
2. Tap an existing Memo to open it then tap the screen to
enter edit mode.
– or –
to start a new memo in text mode with the
Tap
keypad displayed or tap
to start a new memo in
drawing mode using your finger or a compatible
on-screen writing tool. You can change back and forth
in a memo to add text with the keypad and the pen.
Toolbar
Eraser tool allows you to erase marks and drawings.
Show/Hide
Secondary
Toolbar
Undo the last action.
nl
Redo the last action that was undone.
Make a voice recording to add to the memo. This option
is not available in free-format drawing mode.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
Writing area
Add Page
Hide the secondary toolbar.
Show the secondary toolbar.
Keyboard
The icons that you see displayed on the screen are described
in the following table:
Changes the view mode.
Fo
Allows you to add free-format drawing.
Displays the keypad to you can add text.
Provides access to a quick selection bar. Choose from:
Take picture, Images, Clipboard, Maps, and Clip art.
These elements can be used within the memo.
Add an additional page to the memo.
3. Press
to access the following options:
Note: Depending on whether you have saved the memo, are in
keypad mode, or in handwriting mode, the options will
appear differently. The following is a list of the options
you may see.
Applications
196
2. From the Home screen, tap
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
• Export: allows you to save the memo to your Gallery as either a
JPG or as a PDF.
With the S Translator you can easily translate words and
phrases into many different languages.
1. Sign in with your Samsung Account if you have not
already done so. For more information, refer to
“Creating a Samsung Account” on page 14.
• Delete: allows you to delete the S Memo.
S Translator
nl
• Share via: allows you to share your memo as either an Image
file (.jpg), a PDF file (.pdf), Plain text, or S Memo file (.snb) via
Group Play, Wi-Fi Direct, Bluetooth, ChatON, Flipboard, Picasa,
Google+, Messaging, AT&T Locker, Gmail, or Email.
• Save as: allows you to save the memo with a different name.
• Add tag: allows you to set tags to add in searches.
• Add to Favorites: allows you to tag the current memo as a
favorite.
4. Tap the language bar at the bottom of the screen to
select the language that you would like to translate to.
• Change background: allows you to set the background for
your memo. Tap the background that you want, then tap
5. Enter text into the upper box and tap
It will be translated into the language of the upper box.
• Create event: allows you to link the memo to your Calendar
events.
– or –
• Set as: allows you to set a memo as a contact icon, Home
screen wallpaper, or Lock screen wallpaper.
It will be translated into the language of the lower box.
• Print: allows you to print the screen or web page on a
Samsung printer using Wi-Fi.
Fo
When you are finished creating your memo, tap Save on the
top menu bar.
197
➔ S Translator
3. At the S Translator screen, tap the top language bar
and enter your language.
Enter text into the lower box and tap
6. Tap either of the Speak buttons at the bottom of the
screen to translate using either language by using your
voice. The translation will appear automatically in the
appropriate box.
for additional options.
9. At the S Voice screen, tap
to wake up S voice.
10. Speak into the phone and follow the on-screen
instructions.
11. Press
for additional options.
Samsung Apps
With Samsung Apps, you can download hundred of
applications from a variety of categories.
1. Sign on to your Samsung account if you have not
already done so.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
With the S Voice application you can use your voice to
perform operations that you would normally have to do by
hand such as dialing a phone number, texting a message,
playing music, etc.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ S Voice
S Voice
2. Read the Samsung Disclaimer then tap Confirm to
continue.
3. Read the Vlingo Terms of Service then tap Agree to
continue.
4. Read the information on the About S Voice screen, then
tap Next.
5. Read the information on the Say what you want screen,
then tap Next.
6. Read the information on the Wake up S Voice screen,
then tap Next.
7. Read the information on the Edit what you said screen,
then tap Next.
or say “Hi Galaxy”
nl
7. Press
2. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Samsung Apps
3. Tap an application that you would like, then tap Get.
4. Tap Accept and download.
The application is downloaded to your device. You can
find the app icon in your app menu.
5. Press
➔ Help and notices for additional
information.
Fo
8. Read the information on the Help screen, then tap
Finish.
Applications
198
3. Tap Start to begin your Story Album.
Samsung Link
With the Samsung Link app, you can share and play content
across smart devices anytime and anywhere. For more
information, refer to “Samsung Link” on page 84.
Settings
Fo
With Story Album, you can create a digital Album of your
story in media. Special moments will be on a timeline, and if
you wish, you can have your album published as a hard copy.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Story Album
2. Read the introductory information and tap Next.
199
5. Press
➔ Help for additional information.
Talk
Google Talk is a free Windows and web-based application for
instant messaging offered by Google. Conversation logs are
automatically saved to a Chats area in your Gmail account.
This allows you to search a chat log and store them in your
Gmail accounts. For more information, refer to “Google Talk”
on page 115.
TripAdvisor
This widget navigates to the sound and phone settings for
your phone. It includes such settings as: display, security,
memory, and any extra settings associated with your phone.
For more information, refer to “Changing Your Settings” on
page 118.
Story Album
4. Follow the on-screen instructions.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
Samsung Hub is Samsung’s integrated store for media
content that offers a comprehensive and consistent media
service experience. You can browse and purchase all media
content within a single store front. For more information,
refer to “Samsung Hub” on page 81.
nl
Samsung Hub
With the TripAdvisor, you can plan and have your perfect trip.
With over 75 million reviews and opinions by travelers, it is
easy to find the best hotels, restaurants, and fun things to do.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ TripAdvisor
2. Sign in with your Samsung Account if you have not
already done so.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions to use TripAdvisor.
4. Press
for additional options.
Video
The Video application plays video files stored on your
memory card. For more information, refer to “Video” on
page 91.
• Delete: allows you to delete 1 or more voice recordings. Tap
the recordings to delete and tap Delete.
Voice Recorder
to display the following options:
5. Press
• Share via: allows you to share your recording using Bluetooth,
Email, Gmail, Messaging, or Wi-Fi Direct.
2. To start recording, tap Record
microphone.
nl
• Settings: the following settings are available:
– Storage: allows you to choose where your recordings will be
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
The Voice Recorder allows you to record an audio file up to
one minute long and then immediately share it using Wi-Fi
Direct, Messaging, Gmail, or via Bluetooth. Recording time
will vary based on the available memory within the phone.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Voice Recorder
and speak into the
3. During the recording process you can either tap Stop
to
to stop and save the recording or Pause
temporarily halt the recording. After pausing, tap
Record
to resume recording. Once the audio
recording has stopped, the message is automatically
to cancel the recording
saved. Tap Cancel
without saving.
saved. Select between Phone or memory card.
– Recording quality: allows you to set the recording quality to
High or Normal.
– Limit for MMS: allows you to select On or Off. If you Limit for
MMS by selecting On, you will be assured that the recording can
be sent in a message.
– Contextual filename: (requires GPS tagging) allows you to
adjust the filename based on contextual information such as
your current GPS location.
– Default name: allows you to choose the name prefix for your
recordings. For example, if your Default name is Voice, your
recordings would be named Voice 001, Voice 002, Voice 003,
etc.
Fo
4. Tap List
to display a list of all your voice
recordings. Tap a voice recording to play it.
Applications
200
– Recording volume: allows you to assign the ambient noise
quality of your current location so the device can better detect
audio. Choose from High or Low.
or Stereo.
– Skip interval: allows you to assign a skip length.
• End: allows you to close the application.
Voice Search
The Google Voice Search application allows you to search the
web using only your voice.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Voice Search
2.
When the Google Voice Search screen displays, speak
the word or words that you would like to search for on
the internet.
3. If the timer expires and the mic icon changes from red
to gray, tap the mic icon and speak the word or words
that you would like to search for on the internet.
Fo
Results are displayed on your phone.
201
• Images: Displays images for your search.
• Places: Displays places and businesses in your local area
pertaining to your search.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
– Channel: allows you to assign recording mode to either Mono
4. The following options are available at the bottom of
your screen:
• Web: After selecting a different option, tap Web to return to the
original search results.
noise suppression.
nl
– Noise reduction: allows you to activate/deactivate background
• MORE: After tapping MORE, sweep your screen to the left to
see additional options such as News, Shopping, Videos, Blogs,
Discussions, and Books.
• Phone: Displays a phone number if applicable.
WatchON
With the WatchON application, you can use your phone as a
remote control for your TV.
Important! Before initiating use, verify you have an active
Internet connection available (either mobile
network or Wi-Fi connection).
Note: Before beginning your initial WatchON application setup,
confirm your TV is turned off.
2. From the Home screen, tap
➔ WatchON
Note: The process of the initial TV activation can take up to 10
seconds. Please do not press the button again.
8. If the TV turned on, tap Yes.
– or –
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
Note: If you are not connected to an active Wi-Fi, you may be
prompted to continue the set up process via a mobile
network. Click Connect to proceed.
7. Aim your device at the TV and tap
(Power) to
confirm the set up process completed successfully and
the correct TV IR codes were selected.
1. Sign into your Samsung account.
nl
Initial Configuration
3. Select your desired country for your TV Guide’s source
listing and tap Next.
4. Enter your current zip code and tap Done. This zip code
must correspond to the location of your desired TV and
set top box.
5. From the Find your TV service screen, select a service
provider from the available channel listing.
Fo
6. From the Choose your TV Brand screen, tap your TV’s
manufacturer name.
• If you have a brand of TV not listed or you are using a projector,
select from one of the following two options. Choose from
either Other TV Brands or I Have a Projector.
If the TV did not turn on after tapping
waiting 10 seconds, tap No or Retry.
(Power) and
9. From the Choose Your TV Tuner screen, select the entry
that corresponds to your current channel control
method:
• Cable/Satellite/STB/PVR/DVR: selected when changing
channels is done via a receiver box. Channels are not changed
via the TV remote but rather through the receiver/box.
• My xxx TV: selected when a signal is fed directly into the TV
and no box is used. Channels are changed directly on the TV by
using the TV remote and not a box’s remote.
Note: Try matching your current channel selection method.
Applications
202
To change channels:
1. Sign into your Samsung account.
11. When prompted to Enable IR, tap More Info.. to learn
how to configure your set top box to receive and
respond to IR controls.
12. Only after completing the IR setup process and
programming your box, press
Note: This IR programming of your set top box is a one-time
process and once successful should not need to be
repeated.
203
Fo
13. If prompted to personalize your experience, follow the
on-screen instructions.
➔ WatchON
2. From the Home screen, tap
3. From the top of the main screen, tap
(Remote
Control). This launches an on-screen set of remote
control tabs. Choose from one of the following:
• Easy remote: provides the most common used control
features. Scroll down to view additional functions.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
Important! You must configure your set top box for IR
communication with your device. If you do not
select More Info.. below and follow the on-screen
instructions you may not be able to properly use
the application.
Using WatchON
nl
10. Select the Satellite Box Brand from the available list.
For example, DirectTV®.
• If your brand does not appear in the list, tap Other Satellite
Box Brands and follow the on-screen instructions.
• [Set top box]: displays customized control specific to your
configured set top box. Ex: satellite dish remote control
functions.
• TV: provides access to control functions specific to your TV.
4. From the top of the main screen tap
(Select Room)
to choose from different receivers/boxes in different
rooms. (Example: Living Room box, Bedroom box, etc.).
5. Press
to return to the main menu.
Locating your favorite programming:
1. Sign into your Samsung account.
2. From the Home screen, tap
➔ WatchON
Tap Guide to display on your TV an on-screen listing of
available set top box shows.
WatchOn Settings
1. From the Home screen, tap
To configure your Just for you settings:
The Just for you option displays available content matching
your activated media categories. These categories can be
configured during your initial set up or at any later time.
1. Sign into your Samsung account.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
For additional information on the WatchON application,
press
and then select Help.
You can personalize your application to do things such as
show content only from your selected media categories, or
add an additional room’s set top box.
4. Select an available category.
– or –
Personalize WatchON
nl
3. From the main screen Tap
(Combined View) to
reveal available media categories.
➔ WatchON
2. Press
and then select an available on-screen
option:
• Change Room: allows you to select a previously configured
room.
• Settings: provides access to the Samsung WatchOn settings
menu.
• Help: displays on-screen help information.
Fo
• About: displays on-screen information about the application.
2. From the Home screen, tap
3. From the main screen Tap
Just for you.
4. From the On TV tab, press
Settings.
➔ WatchON
(Combined View) ➔
and then select
5. Access parameters such as Basic info, Genres and
Sports to then configure and enable those parameters
you would like to show in the Just for you tab.
To add a new room:
Your device can be used to control boxes/receivers from
several rooms. You could go from controlling your set top box
in your living room and then move into your bedroom to do
the same.
Applications
204
1. Sign into your Samsung account.
1. From the Home screen, tap
and then select Settings
4. Name the new room and tap Next.
6. Follow steps 4-10 starting on page 202 to complete
the process.
YouTube
YouTube™ is a video sharing website on which users can
upload and share videos. The site is used to display a wide
variety of user-generated video content, including movie
clips, TV clips, and music videos, as well as video content
such as video blogging, informational shorts and other
original videos.
205
Fo
Note: YouTube is a data-intensive feature. It is recommended
that you upgrade to a large data plan to avoid additional
data charges.
to search for specific videos,
3. Tap the search field
scroll down to browse through the main page
thumbnails, or scroll to the bottom to explore additional
options.
4. To view a video, tap an available preview thumbnail or
tap the title link.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
5. Enter your current zip code and tap Done. This zip code
must correspond to the location of your desired TV and
set top box.
➔ YouTube
2. At the You Tube introduction screen, tap OK.
3. From the On TV tab, press
➔ Add room.
➔ WatchON
nl
2. From the Home screen, tap
To watch a high quality video:
䡲
Press
and then tap Settings ➔ General ➔ High
quality on mobile.
To configure YouTube Settings:
䡲
Press
and then tap Settings and configure the
following parameters:
• General
– High quality on mobile, when enabled, allows you to start all
videos in high quality mode while you are connected to a mobile
network.
– Caption font size allows you to set the font size used by onscreen captions. Choose from: Small, Medium, Large, or Huge.
– Uploads specifies network preferences for uploads.
– Improve YouTube allows you to anonymously send YouTube
information to help improve the application.
• Channel Feed Content
– Sets the content that you want to appear within your channel
– Preload watch later allows you to enable the preload function
on selected videos so you can watch them later. Read the data
usage information and tap OK to accept the terms.
Note: Preloading YouTube videos will use some of your
device’s storage space and may result in additional
charges if your Wi-Fi plan is not unlimited.
videos from a specific country or region.
nl
– Content localization allows you to prioritize channels and
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
feed. All activity is the default option.
• Search
• About
– Clear search history allows you to clear previous YouTube
searches from showing up in the YouTube search box.
– Never remember history allows you to force YouTube to never
store search history information.
– Help: provides answers to most YouTube questions.
– Feedback: allows you to provide user feedback to YouTube.
– Google Mobile Terms of Service: displays the Google Mobile
Terms of Service.
– SafeSearch filtering allows you to configure block settings for
– YouTube Terms of Service: displays the YouTube terms of
videos containing restricted content. This option blocks these
videos from appearing within your search results. Choose from:
Don’t filter, Moderate, or Strict blocking.
– Google Mobile Privacy Policy: displays the Google Mobile
• Preloading
– Preload subscriptions allows you to preload (or go get videos
Fo
while on Wi-Fi and charging) your subscription videos.
Service.
Privacy Policy.
– YouTube Privacy Policy: displays the YouTube Privacy Policy.
– Open source licenses: displays the Open source licenses
– App version: displays the software version for the current
YouTube application.
Applications
206
YPmobile
2. Sign on to your Google account if you have not already
done so. For more information, refer to “Creating a
New Google Account” on page 14.
3. Read the End-User License Agreement (EULA) and tap
Accept to continue.
nl
4. Your location is found using GPS. Tap OK to allow
YPmobile to use your current location.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
Note: It is not necessary to sign in to the YouTube site to view
content. However, if you wish to sign in to access
additional options, access the page via the Web browser
and tap Sign in at the top right corner, enter your
YouTube or Google username and password, and tap
Sign in.
5. Tap the Find a business nearby! field.
The Yellowpages Mobile application provides quick and ready
access to businesses, map locations, and storage of your
favorite searches. This application allows you to tap into local
businesses, locations, and events, connecting you to your
search in real-time.
6. Enter information in the What: and Near: fields and tap
Search.
Note: The first time you use YP, you will need to download the
updated application from the Play Store. When the Play
Store page displays, tap Update or Install then follow the
on-screen instructions. For more information, refer to
“Play Store” on page 194.
9. Pinch the map screen inwards to zoom out or pinch it
outwards to zoom in.
207
➔ YPmobile
Fo
1. From the Home screen, tap
7. Results will be displayed.
(Map) to see the locations marked with pins
8. Tap
on the map.
10. Tap a pin to read information about the location.
11. Tap
to display additional options.
Section 11: Health and Safety Information
Do cell phones pose a health hazard?
nl
Many people are concerned that cell phone radiation will
cause cancer or other serious health hazards. The weight of
scientific evidence has not linked cell phones with any health
problems.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
This device is capable of operating in Wi-Fi mode in the 2.4
and 5 GHz bands. The FCC requires that devices operating
within 5.15-5.25 GHz may only be used indoors, not outside,
in order to avoid interference with Mobile Satellite Services
(MSS).
This section outlines the safety precautions associated with
using your phone. The terms “mobile device” or “cell phone”
are used in this section to refer to your phone. Read this
information before using your mobile device.
Exposure to Radio Frequency (RF)
Signals
Fo
The U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) has published
information for consumers relating to Radio Frequency (RF)
exposure from wireless phones. The FDA publication
includes the following information:
Cell phones emit low levels of Radio Frequency (RF) energy.
Over the past 15 years, scientists have conducted hundreds
of studies looking at the biological effects of the radio
frequency energy emitted by cell phones. While some
researchers have reported biological changes associated
with RF energy, these studies have failed to be replicated.
The majority of studies published have failed to show an
association between exposure to radio frequency from a cell
phone and health problems.
The low levels of RF cell phones emit while in use are in the
microwave frequency range. They also emit RF at
substantially reduced time intervals when in the stand-by
mode. Whereas high levels of RF can produce health effects
(by heating tissue), exposure to low level RF that does not
produce heating effects causes no known adverse health
effects.
Health and Safety Information
208
y
The results of most studies conducted to date say no. In
addition, attempts to replicate and confirm the few studies
that have shown a connection have failed.
The scientific community at large therefore believes that the
weight of scientific evidence does not show an association
between exposure to Radio Frequency (RF) from cell phones
and adverse health outcomes. Still the scientific community
has supported additional research to address gaps in
knowledge. Some of these studies are described below.
Interphone Study
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
Very high levels of electromagnetic energy, such as is found
in X-rays and gamma rays, can ionize biological tissues.
Ionization is a process where electrons are stripped away
from their normal locations in atoms and molecules. It can
permanently damage biological tissues including DNA, the
genetic material.
Research Results to Date: Is there a connection
between RF and certain health problems?
nl
The biological effects of radio frequency energy should not
be confused with the effects from other types of
electromagnetic energy.
The energy levels associated with radio frequency energy,
including both radio waves and microwaves, are not great
enough to cause ionization of atoms and molecules.
Therefore, RF energy is a type of non-ionizing radiation.
Other types of non-ionizing radiation include visible light,
infrared radiation (heat), and other forms of electromagnetic
radiation with relatively low frequencies.
209
Fo
While RF energy does not ionize particles, large amounts can
increase body temperatures and cause tissue damage. Two
areas of the body, the eyes and the testes, are particularly
vulnerable to RF heating because there is relatively little
blood flow in them to carry away excess heat.
Interphone is a large international study designed to
determine whether cell phones increase the risk of head and
neck cancer. A report published in the International Journal
of Epidemiology (June, 2010) compared cell phone usage for
more than 5,000 people with brain tumors (glioma and
meningioma) and a similar number of healthy controls.
Results of this study did NOT show that cell phones caused
brain cancer. In this study, most people had no increased risk
of brain cancer from using cell phones. For people with the
heaviest use of cell phones (an average of more than ½ hour
per day, every day, for over 10 years) the study suggested a
y
MOBI-KIDS is an international study investigating the
relationship between exposure to radio frequency energy
from communication technologies including cell phones and
brain cancer in young people. This is an international
multi-center study involving 14 European and non-European
countries. Additional information about MOBI-KIDS can be
found at
http://www.creal.cat/programes-recerca/en_projectes-creal/
view.php?ID=39.
Surveillance, Epidemiology, and End Results (SEER)
Program of the National Cancer Institute
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
Interphone is the largest cell phone study to date, but it did
not answer all questions about cell phone safety. Additional
research is being conducted around the world, and the FDA
continues to monitor developments in this field.
International Cohort Study on Mobile Phone Users
(COSMOS)
Risk of Brain Cancer from Exposure to Radio
Frequency Fields in Childhood and Adolescence
(MOBI-KIDS)
nl
slight increase in brain cancer. However, the authors
determined that biases and errors prevented any conclusions
being drawn from this data. Additional information about
Interphone can be found at
http://www.iarc.fr/en/media-centre/pr/2010/pdfs/pr200_E.pdf.
Fo
The COSMOS study aims to conduct long-term health
monitoring of a large group of people to determine if there
are any health issues linked to long-term exposure to radio
frequency energy from cell phone use. The COSMOS study
will follow approximately 300,000 adult cell phone users in
Europe for 20 to 30 years. Additional information about the
COSMOS study can be found at
http://www.ukcosmos.org/index.html.
The National Cancer Institute (NCI) actively follows cancer
statistics in the United States to detect any change in rates of
new cases for brain cancer. If cell phones play a role in risk
for brain cancer, rates should go up, because heavy cell
phone use has been common for quite some time in the U.S.
Between 1987 and 2005, the overall age-adjusted incidence
of brain cancer did not increase. Additional information about
SEER can be found at
http://seer.cancer.gov/.
Health and Safety Information
210
Steps to Reduce Exposure to Radio Frequency Energy
If there is a risk from being exposed to radio frequency
energy (RF) from cell phones - and at this point we do not
know that there is - it is probably very small. But, if you are
concerned about avoiding even potential risks, you can take
a few simple steps to minimize your RF exposure.
• Reduce the amount of time spent using your cell phone;
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
• Design cell phones in a way that minimizes any RF exposure to
the user; and
Reducing Exposure: Hands-Free Kits and Other
Accessories
Although the existing scientific data do not justify FDA
regulatory actions, the FDA has urged the cell phone industry
to take a number of steps, including the following:
• Support-needed research on possible biological effects of RF
for the type of signal emitted by cell phones;
nl
Cell Phone Industry Actions
• Cooperate in providing users of cell phones with the current
information on cell phone use and human health concerns.
211
Fo
The FDA also is working with voluntary standard-setting
bodies such as the Institute of Electrical and Electronics
Engineers (IEEE), the International Commission on
Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection (ICNIRP), and others to
assure that safety standards continue to adequately protect
the public.
• Use speaker mode or a headset to place more distance between
your head and the cell phone.
Hands-Free Kits
Hands-free kits may include audio or Bluetooth® headsets
and various types of body-worn accessories such as
belt-clips and holsters. Combinations of these can be used to
reduce RF energy absorption from cell phones.
Headsets can substantially reduce exposure because the
phone is held away from the head in the user's hand or in
approved body-worn accessories. Cell phones marketed in
the U.S. are required to meet RF exposure compliance
requirements when used against the head and against the
body.
y
The scientific evidence does not show a danger to any users
of cell phones from RF exposure, including children and
teenagers. The steps adults can take to reduce RF exposure
apply to children and teenagers as well.
• Reduce the amount of time spent on the cell phone;
• Use speaker mode or a headset to place more distance between
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
Because there are no known risks from exposure to RF
emissions from cell phones, there is no reason to believe that
accessories which claim to shield the head from those
emissions reduce risks. Some products that claim to shield
the user from RF absorption use special phone cases, while
others involve nothing more than a metallic accessory
attached to the phone.
Children and Cell Phones
nl
Because there are no known risks from exposure to RF
emissions from cell phones, there is no reason to believe that
hands-free kits reduce risks. Hands-free kits can be used for
convenience and comfort. They are also required by law in
many states if you want to use your phone while driving.
Cell Phone Accessories that Claim to Shield the Head
from RF Radiation
Fo
Studies have shown that these products generally do not
work as advertised. Unlike “hands-free” kits, these so-called
“shields” may interfere with proper operation of the phone.
The phone may be forced to boost its power to compensate,
leading to an increase in RF absorption.
the head and the cell phone.
Some groups sponsored by other national governments have
advised that children be discouraged from using cell phones
at all. For example, The Stewart Report from the United
Kingdom made such a recommendation in December 2000.
In this report, a group of independent experts noted that no
evidence exists that using a cell phone causes brain tumors
or other ill effects. Their recommendation to limit cell phone
use by children was strictly precautionary; it was not based
on scientific evidence that any health hazard exists.
Additional information on the safety of RF exposures from
various sources can be obtained from the following
organizations (updated 10/1/2010):
• FCC RF Safety Program:
http://www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety/.
Health and Safety Information
212
• Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA):
http://www.osha.gov/SLTC/radiofrequencyradiation/.
(Note: This web address is case sensitive.)
http://www.cdc.gov/niosh/.
• World Health Organization (WHO):
http://www.who.int/peh-emf/en/.
• International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection:
http://www.icnirp.de.
• Health Protection Agency:
http://www.hpa.org.uk/Topics/Radiation/.
• US Food and Drug Administration:
Fo
http://www.fda.gov/Radiation-EmittingProducts/
RadiationEmittingProductsandProcedures/
HomeBusinessandEntertainment/CellPhones/default.htm.
213
Your wireless phone is a radio transmitter and receiver. It is
designed and manufactured not to exceed the exposure
limits for Radio Frequency (RF) energy set by the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) of the U.S. Government.
These FCC RF exposure limits are derived from the
recommendations of two expert organizations: the National
Council on Radiation Protection and Measurement (NCRP)
and the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
(IEEE). In both cases, the recommendations were developed
by scientific and engineering experts drawn from industry,
government, and academia after extensive reviews of the
scientific literature related to the biological effects of RF
energy.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
• National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH):
Specific Absorption Rate (SAR)
Certification Information
http://www.epa.gov/radtown/wireless-tech.html.
nl
• Environmental Protection Agency (EPA):
The RF exposure limit set by the FCC for wireless mobile
phones employs a unit of measurement known as the
Specific Absorption Rate (SAR). The SAR is a measure of the
rate of absorption of RF energy by the human body
expressed in units of watts per kilogram (W/kg). The FCC
requires wireless phones to comply with a safety limit of 1.6
watts per kilogram (1.6 W/kg).
y
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
SAR tests are conducted using standard operating positions
accepted by the FCC with the phone transmitting at its
highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands.
Although the SAR is determined at the highest certified
power level, the actual SAR level of the phone while
operating can be well below the maximum reported value.
This is because the phone is designed to operate at multiple
power levels so as to use only the power required to reach
the network. In general, the closer you are to a wireless base
station antenna, the lower the power output of the phone.
Use of other accessories may not ensure compliance with
FCC RF exposure guidelines. The FCC has granted an
Equipment Authorization for this mobile device with all
reported SAR levels evaluated as in compliance with the FCC
RF exposure guidelines. This [mobile phone/tablet/device]
has a FCC ID number: A3LSGHI527 [Model Number: SGHi527] and the specific SAR levels for this [mobile phone/
tablet/device] can be found at the following FCC website:
http://www.fcc.gov/oet/ea/.
nl
The FCC SAR limit incorporates a substantial margin of safety
to give additional protection to the public and to account for
any variations in measurements.
Fo
Before a new model phone is available for sale to the public,
it must be tested and certified to the FCC that it does not
exceed the SAR limit established by the FCC. Tests for each
model phone are performed in positions and locations (e.g. at
the ear and worn on the body) as required by the FCC. For
body-worn operation, this phone has been tested and meets
FCC RF exposure guidelines when used with an accessory
that contains no metal and that positions the mobile device a
minimum of 1.0 cm from the body.
The SAR information for this device can also be found on
Samsung’s website: http://www.samsung.com/sar.
SAR information on this and other model phones can be
accessed online on the FCC's website through http://
transition.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety/sar.html. To find information that
pertains to a particular model phone, this site uses the phone
FCC ID number which is usually printed somewhere on the
case of the phone. Sometimes it may be necessary to
remove the battery pack to find the number. Once you have
the FCC ID number for a particular phone, follow the
instructions on the website and it should provide values for
typical or maximum SAR for a particular phone. Additional
SAR information can also be obtained at
http://www.fcc.gov/encyclopedia/specific-absorption-rate-sarcellular-telephones.
Health and Safety Information
214
that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Commercial Mobile Alerting System
(CMAS)
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This
device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
Pursuant to part 15.21 of the FCC Rules, you are cautioned
that changes or modifications not expressly approved by
Samsung could void your authority to operate the device.
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from
nl
FCC Part 15 Information to User
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply
with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part
15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and
can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and
used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications.
215
Fo
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not
occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does
cause harmful interference to radio or television reception,
which can be determined by turning the equipment off and
on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference
by one or more of the following measures:
This device is designed to receive wireless emergency alerts
from the Commercial Mobile Alerting System ("CMAS";
which may also be known as the Personal Localized Alerting
Network ("PLAN")). If your wireless provider has chosen to
participate in CMAS/PLAN, alerts are available while in the
provider's coverage area. If you travel outside your provider's
coverage area, wireless emergency alerts may not be
available. For more information, please contact your wireless
provider.
Smart Practices While Driving
On the Road - Off the Phone
The primary responsibility of every driver is the safe
operation of his or her vehicle.
If you consider a call necessary and appropriate, follow these
tips:
• Use a hands-free device;
nl
• Secure your phone within easy reach;
• Place calls when you are not moving;
• Plan calls when your car will be stationary;
• Do not engage in stressful or emotional conversations;
• Let the person with whom you are speaking know that you are
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
Responsible drivers understand that no secondary task
should be performed while driving whether it be eating,
drinking, talking to passengers, or talking on a mobile phone
- unless the driver has assessed the driving conditions and is
confident that the secondary task will not interfere with their
primary responsibility. Do not engage in any activity while
driving a moving vehicle which may cause you to take your
eyes off the road or become so absorbed in the activity that
your ability to concentrate on the act of driving becomes
impaired. Samsung is committed to promoting responsible
driving and giving drivers the tools they need to understand
and address distractions.
Check the laws and regulations on the use of mobile devices
and their accessories in the areas where you drive. Always
obey them. The use of these devices may be prohibited or
restricted in certain areas. For example, only hands-free use
may be permitted in certain areas.
Fo
Before answering calls, consider your circumstances. Let the
call go to voicemail when driving conditions require.
Remember, driving comes first, not the call!
driving and will suspend the call if necessary;
• Do not take notes or look up phone numbers while driving;
Notice regarding legal restrictions on mounting this device in
an automobile:
Laws in some states may prohibit mounting this device on or
near the windshield of an automobile. In other states, the law
may permit mounting this device only in specific locations in
the automobile. Be sure to consult the state and local laws or
ordinances where you drive before mounting this device in
an automobile. Failure to comply with these restrictions could
result in fines, penalties, or other damages.
Never mount this device in a manner that will obstruct the
driver's clear view of the street and traffic.
Health and Safety Information
216
For more information, go to http://www.ctia.org.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
Battery Use and Safety
Liquids can get into the phone's circuits, leading to corrosion.
Even when the phone appears to be dry and appears to operate
normally, the circuitry could slowly corrode and pose a safety
hazard. If the phone and/or battery get wet, have them checked
by your service provider or contact Samsung, even if they appear
to be working properly.
Never watch videos, such as a movie or clip, or play video
games while operating a vehicle.
• Do not let the phone or battery come in contact with liquids.
nl
Never use wireless data services such as text messaging, Web
browsing, or e-mail while operating a vehicle.
Important! Handle and store batteries properly to avoid injury or
damage. Most battery issues arise from improper
handling of batteries and, particularly, from the
continued use of damaged batteries.
• Do not disassemble, crush, puncture, shred, or otherwise
attempt to change the form of your battery. Do not put a high
degree of pressure on the battery. This can cause leakage or an
internal short-circuit, resulting in overheating.
• Do not place your battery in or near a heat source. Excessive
heating can damage the phone or the battery and could cause the
phone or the battery to explode. Do not dry a wet or damp battery
with an appliance or heat source such as a microwave oven, hair
dryer, iron, or radiator. Avoid leaving your phone in your car in
high temperatures.
• Do not dispose of the phone or the battery in a fire. The phone
or the battery may explode when overheated.
• Do not handle a damaged or leaking battery. Do not let leaking
217
Fo
battery fluid come in contact with your eyes, skin or clothing. For
safe disposal options, contact your nearest Samsung-authorized
service center.
• Never use any charger or battery that is damaged in any way.
• Do not allow the battery to touch metal objects. Accidental
Use of a non-Samsung-approved battery or charger may
present a risk of fire, explosion, leakage, or other hazard.
Samsung's warranty does not cover damage to the phone
caused by non-Samsung-approved batteries and/or
chargers.
• Do not use incompatible cell phone batteries and chargers.
Some websites and second-hand dealers not associated with
reputable manufacturers and carriers, might be selling
incompatible or even counterfeit batteries and chargers.
Consumers should purchase manufacturer or
carrier-recommended products and accessories. If unsure about
whether a replacement battery or charger is compatible, contact
the manufacturer of the battery or charger.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
short-circuiting can occur when a metallic object (coin, key,
jewelry, clip, or pen) causes a direct connection between the +
and - terminals of the battery (metal strips on the battery), for
example when you carry a spare battery in a pocket or bag.
Short-circuiting the terminals may damage the battery or the
object causing the short-circuiting.
WARNING!
battery, especially on a hard surface, can potentially cause
damage to the phone and battery. If you suspect damage to the
phone or battery, take it to a service center for inspection.
nl
• Avoid dropping the cell phone. Dropping the phone or the
Fo
Important! Use only Samsung-approved batteries, and
recharge your battery only with
Samsung-approved chargers which are
specifically designed for your phone.
• Misuse or use of incompatible phones, batteries, and
charging devices could result in damage to the equipment
and a possible risk of fire, explosion, or leakage, leading to
serious injuries, damages to your phone, or other serious
hazard.
Health and Safety Information
218
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
Proper disposal of your mobile device and its battery is not
only important for safety, it benefits the environment.
Batteries must be recycled or disposed of properly.
Recycling programs for your mobile device, batteries, and
accessories may not be available in your area.
We've made it easy for you to recycle your old Samsung
mobile device by working with respected take-back
companies in every state in the country.
Drop It Off
Fo
You can drop off your Samsung-branded mobile device
and batteries for recycling at one of our numerous
Samsung Recycling Direct (SM) locations. A list of these
locations may be found at:
http://pages.samsung.com/us/recyclingdirect/
usactivities_environment_samsungrecyclingdirect_locations.jsp
219
Consumers may also recycle their used mobile device or
batteries at many retail or carrier-provided locations
where mobile devices and batteries are sold. Additional
information regarding specific locations may be found at:
http://www.epa.gov/epawaste/partnerships/plugin/cellphone/
index.htm or at http://www.call2recycle.org/.
Samsung cares for the environment and encourages its
customers to recycle Samsung mobile devices and genuine
Samsung accessories.
Samsung-branded devices and batteries will be accepted
at these locations for no fee.
nl
Samsung Mobile Products and
Recycling
Mail It In
The Samsung Mobile Take-Back Program will provide
Samsung customers with a free recycling mailing label.
Just go to
http://www.samsung.com/us/aboutsamsung/citizenship/
usactivities_environment_samsungrecyclingdirect.html?INT=ST
A_recyle_your_phone_page and follow the instructions to
print out a free pre-paid postage label and then send your
old mobile device or battery to the address listed, via U.S.
Mail, for recycling.
Dispose of unwanted electronics through an approved
recycler.
To find the nearest recycling location, go to our website:
www.samsung.com/recyclingdirect
Or call, (877) 278-0799.
Display / Touch-Screen
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
Warning! Never dispose of batteries in a fire because they may
explode.
Dispose of your mobile device and batteries in accordance
with local regulations. In some areas, the disposal of these
items in household or business trash may be prohibited. Help
us protect the environment - recycle!
FOR CONNECTION TO A SUPPLY NOT IN NORTH
AMERICA, USE AN ATTACHMENT PLUG ADAPTOR
OF THE PROPER CONFIGURATION FOR THE
POWER OUTLET.
THIS POWER UNIT IS INTENDED TO BE
CORRECTLY ORIENTED IN A VERTICAL OR
HORIZONTAL OR FLOOR MOUNT POSITION.
nl
Follow local regulations regarding disposal of mobile
devices and batteries
UL Certified Travel Charger
The Travel Charger for this phone has met applicable UL
safety requirements. Please adhere to the following safety
instructions per UL guidelines:
FAILURE TO FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS OUTLINED MAY
LEAD TO SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY AND POSSIBLE
PROPERTY DAMAGE.
Please note the following information when using your
mobile device:
WARNING REGARDING DISPLAY
The display on your mobile device is made of glass or
acrylic and could break if your mobile device is
dropped or if it receives significant impact. Do not use
if screen is broken or cracked as this could cause
injury to you.
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS - SAVE THESE
INSTRUCTIONS.
Fo
DANGER - TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR
ELECTRIC SHOCK, CAREFULLY FOLLOW THESE
INSTRUCTIONS.
Health and Safety Information
220
GPS
Certain Samsung mobile devices can use a Global Positioning
System (GPS) signal for location-based applications. A GPS
uses satellites controlled by the U.S. Government that are
subject to changes implemented in accordance with the
Department of Defense policy and the 2008 Federal Radio
navigation Plan (FRP). Changes may affect the performance
of location-based technology on your mobile device.
Fo
Even with GPS, when you make an emergency call:
• Always tell the emergency responder your location to the best of
your ability; and
221
responder instructs you.
Navigation
Maps, directions, and other navigation-data, including data
relating to your current location, may contain inaccurate or
incomplete data, and circumstances can and do change over
time. In some areas, complete information may not be
available. Therefore, you should always visually confirm that
the navigational instructions are consistent with what you see
before following them. All users should pay attention to road
conditions, closures, traffic, and all other factors that may
impact safe driving or walking. Always obey posted road signs.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
If your mobile device has a touch-screen display,
please note that a touch-screen responds best to a
light touch from the pad of your finger or a non-metallic
stylus. Using excessive force or a metallic object when
pressing on the touch-screen may damage the
tempered glass surface and void the warranty. For
more information, please refer to the “Standard
Limited Warranty”.
• Remain on the mobile device for as long as the emergency
nl
WARRANTY DISCLAIMER: PROPER USE OF A
TOUCH-SCREEN MOBILE DEVICE
Emergency Calls
This mobile device, like any wireless mobile device, operates
using radio signals, wireless and landline networks, as well
as user-programmed functions, which cannot guarantee
connection in all conditions, areas, or circumstances.
Therefore, you should never rely solely on any wireless
mobile device for essential communications (medical
emergencies, for example). Before traveling in remote or
underdeveloped areas, plan an alternate method of
contacting emergency services personnel. Remember, to
To make an emergency call:
1. If the phone is not on, switch it on.
2. From the Home screen, tap
Your mobile device is a product of superior design and
craftsmanship and should be treated with care. The
suggestions below will help you fulfill any warranty
obligations and allow you to enjoy this product for many
years:
. The dialer is
Keep your Samsung Mobile Device away from:
Liquids of any kind
displayed.
3. Key in the emergency number for your present location
(for example, 911 or other official emergency number).
Emergency numbers vary by location.
4. Tap the
Care and Maintenance
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
Emergency calls may not be possible on all wireless mobile
device networks or when certain network services and/or
mobile device features are in use. Check with local service
providers.
may be the only means of communication at the scene of an
accident; do not cut off the call until given permission to do
so.
nl
make or receive any calls, the mobile device must be
switched on and in a service area with adequate signal
strength.
key.
Fo
If certain features are in use (call blocking, for example), you
may first need to deactivate those features before you can
make an emergency call. Consult your User Manual and your
local cellular service provider. When making an emergency
call, remember to give all the necessary information as
accurately as possible. Remember that your mobile device
Keep the mobile device dry. Precipitation, humidity, and
liquids contain minerals that will corrode electronic
circuits. If the mobile device does get wet, do not
accelerate drying with the use of an oven, microwave, or
dryer, because this may damage the mobile device and
could cause a fire or explosion.
Do not use the mobile device with a wet hand. Doing so
may cause an electric shock to you or damage to the
mobile device.
Health and Safety Information
222
Extreme heat or cold
Responsible Listening
Avoid temperatures below 0°C / 32°F or above 45°C /
113°F.
Caution! Avoid potential hearing loss.
Dust and dirt
Do not expose your mobile device to dust, dirt, or sand.
Cleaning solutions
Do not use harsh chemicals, cleaning solvents, or strong
detergents to clean the mobile device. Wipe it with a soft
cloth slightly dampened in a mild soap-and-water
solution.
Shock or vibration
Do not drop, knock, or shake the mobile device. Rough
handling can break internal circuit boards.
Paint
Fo
Do not paint the mobile device. Paint can clog the
device’s moving parts or ventilation openings and prevent
proper operation.
223
Damage to hearing occurs when a person is exposed to loud
sounds over time. The risk of hearing loss increases as
sound is played louder and for longer durations. Prolonged
exposure to loud sounds (including music) is the most
common cause of preventable hearing loss. Some scientific
research suggests that using portable audio devices, such as
portable music players and cell phones, at high volume
settings for long durations may lead to permanent
noise-induced hearing loss.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
Do not try to dry your mobile device in a microwave oven.
Doing so may cause a fire or explosion.
nl
Microwaves
This includes the use of headphones (including headsets,
earbuds, and Bluetooth® or other wireless devices).
Exposure to very loud sound has also been associated in
some studies with tinnitus (a ringing in the ear),
hypersensitivity to sound, and distorted hearing. Individual
susceptibility to noise-induced hearing loss and potential
hearing problem varies. Additionally, the amount of sound
produced by a portable audio device varies depending on the
nature of the sound, the device settings, and the headphones
that are used. As a result, there is no single volume setting
that is appropriate for everyone or for every combination of
sound, settings, and equipment.
• Limit the amount of time you listen. As the volume increases, less
You should follow some common sense recommendations
when using any portable audio device:
• Always turn the volume down before plugging the earphones into
an audio source.
such as rock concerts, that might cause temporary hearing loss.
Temporary hearing loss might cause unsafe volumes to sound
normal.
time is required before you hearing could be affected.
nl
• Avoid using headphones after exposure to extremely loud noises,
• Do not listen at any volume that causes you discomfort. If you
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
• Set the volume in a quiet environment and select the lowest
volume at which you can hear adequately.
• Be aware that you can adapt to higher volume settings over time,
not realizing that the higher volume may be harmful to your
hearing.
experience ringing in your ears, hear muffled speech, or
experience any temporary hearing difficulty after listening to your
portable audio device, discontinue use and consult your doctor.
You can obtain additional information on this subject from the
following sources:
• When using headphones, turn the volume down if you cannot
hear the people speaking near you or if the person sitting next to
you can hear what you are listening to.
• Do not turn the volume up to block out noisy surroundings. If you
Fo
choose to listen to your portable device in a noisy environment,
use noise-cancelling headphones to block out background
environmental noise. By blocking background environment noise,
noise cancelling headphones should allow you to hear the music
at lower volumes than when using earbuds.
American Academy of Audiology
11730 Plaza American Drive, Suite 300
Reston, VA 20190
Voice: (800) 222-2336
Email: info@audiology.org
Internet:
http://www.audiology.org/Pages/
default.aspx
Health and Safety Information
224
National Institutes of Health
31 Center Drive, MSC 2320
Bethesda, MD 20892-2320
Internet:
http://www.cdc.gov/niosh/topics/noise/
default.html
1-888-232-6348 TTY
nl
Email: nidcdinfo@nih.gov
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
Operating Environment
Internet:
http://www.nidcd.nih.gov/
National Institute for Occupational Safety
and Health (NIOSH)
395 E Street, S.W., Suite 9200
Patriots Plaza Building
Washington, DC 20201
Fo
Voice: 1-800-35-NIOSH
(1-800-356-4674)
1-800-CDC-INFO (1-800-232-4636)
Outside the U.S. 513-533-8328
225
Email: cdcinfo@cdc.gov
National Institute on Deafness and Other
Communication Disorders
Remember to follow any special regulations in force in any
area, and always switch your mobile device off whenever it is
forbidden to use it, or when it may cause interference or
danger. When connecting the mobile device or any accessory
to another device, read its user's guide for detailed safety
instructions. Do not connect incompatible products.
Using Your Mobile Device Near Other Electronic
Devices
Most modern electronic equipment is shielded from Radio
Frequency (RF) signals. However, certain electronic
equipment may not be shielded against the RF signals from
your wireless mobile device. Consult the manufacturer to
discuss alternatives.
Other Medical Devices
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
Persons who have such devices:
• Should ALWAYS keep the mobile device more than six (6) inches
from their implantable medical device when the mobile device is
turned ON;
• Should not carry the mobile device in a breast pocket;
• Should use the ear opposite the implantable medical device to
minimize the potential for interference;
If you use any other personal medical devices, consult the
manufacturer of your device to determine if it is adequately
shielded from external RF energy. Your physician may be able
to assist you in obtaining this information. Switch your
mobile device off in health care facilities when any
regulations posted in these areas instruct you to do so.
Hospitals or health care facilities may be using equipment
that could be sensitive to external RF energy.
Vehicles
A minimum separation of six (6) inches should be maintained
between a handheld wireless mobile device and an
implantable medical device, such as a pacemaker or
implantable cardioverter defibrillator, to avoid potential
interference with the device.
nl
Implantable Medical Devices
• Should turn the mobile device OFF immediately if there is any
reason to suspect that interference is taking place;
• Should read and follow the directions from the manufacturer of
your implantable medical device. If you have any questions about
using your wireless mobile device with an implantable medical
device, consult your health care provider.
Fo
For more information see: http://www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety/rffaqs.html#.
RF signals may affect improperly installed or inadequately
shielded electronic systems in motor vehicles. Check with
the manufacturer or its representative regarding your vehicle
before using your mobile device in a motor vehicle. You
should also consult the manufacturer of any equipment that
has been added to your vehicle.
Posted Facilities
Switch your mobile device off in any facility where posted
notices require you to do so.
Potentially Explosive Environments
Switch your mobile device off when in any area with a
potentially explosive atmosphere and obey all signs and
instructions. Sparks in such areas could cause an explosion
Health and Safety Information
226
y
The U.S. Federal Communications Commission (FCC) has
established requirements for digital wireless mobile devices
to be compatible with hearing aids and other assistive
hearing devices.
When individuals employing some assistive hearing devices
(hearing aids and cochlear implants) use wireless mobile
devices, they may detect a buzzing, humming, or whining
noise. Some hearing devices are more immune than others
to this interference noise, and mobile devices also vary in the
amount of interference they generate.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
Users are reminded of the need to observe restrictions on the
use of radio equipment in fuel depots (fuel storage and
distribution areas), chemical plants, or where blasting
operations are in progress. Areas with a potentially explosive
atmosphere are often, but not always, clearly marked. They
include below deck on boats, chemical transfer or storage
facilities, vehicles using liquefied petroleum gas (such as
propane or butane), areas where the air contains chemicals
or particles, such as grain, dust, or metal powders, and any
other area where you would normally be advised to turn off
your vehicle engine.
When your Device is Wet
FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility (HAC)
Regulations for Wireless Devices
nl
or fire resulting in bodily injury or even death. Users are
advised to switch the mobile device off while at a refueling
point (service station).
227
Fo
Do not turn on your device if it is wet. If your device is
already on, turn it off and remove the battery immediately (if
the device will not turn off or you cannot remove the battery,
leave it as-is). Then, dry the device with a towel and take it
to a service center.
The wireless telephone industry has developed a rating
system for wireless mobile devices to assist hearing device
users find mobile devices that may be compatible with their
hearing devices. Not all mobile devices have been rated.
Mobile devices that are rated have the rating on their box or
a label located on the box.
The ratings are not guarantees. Results will vary depending
on the user's hearing device and hearing loss. If your hearing
device happens to be vulnerable to interference, you may not
hearing aid meets the M2 level rating and the wireless
mobile device meets the M3 level rating, the sum of the two
values equals M5.
M-Ratings: Wireless mobile devices rated M3 or M4 meet
FCC requirements and are likely to generate less interference
to hearing devices than mobile devices that are not labeled.
M4 is the better/higher of the two ratings. M-ratings refer to
enabling acoustic coupling with hearing aids that do not
operate in telecoil mode.
Under the standard, this should provide the hearing aid user
with normal use while using the hearing aid with the
particular wireless mobile device. A sum of 6 or more would
indicate excellent performance.
nl
be able to use a rated mobile device successfully. Trying out
the mobile device with your hearing device is the best way to
evaluate it for your personal needs.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
However, these are not guarantees that all users will be
satisfied. T ratings work similarly.
T-Ratings: Mobile devices rated T3 or T4 meet FCC
requirements and are likely to generate less interference to
hearing devices than mobile devices that are not labeled. T4
is the better/higher of the two ratings. T-ratings refer to
enabling inductive coupling with hearing aids operating in
telecoil mode.
Hearing devices may also be rated. Your hearing aid
manufacturer or hearing health professional may help you
find this rating. Higher ratings mean that the hearing device
is relatively immune to interference noise.
Fo
Under the current industry standard, American National
Standards Institute (ANSI) C63.19, the hearing aid and
wireless mobile device rating values are added together to
indicate how usable they are together. For example, if a
M3
M2
T3
T2
Health and Safety Information
228
FCC Notice and Cautions
FCC Notice
The mobile device may cause TV or radio interference if used
in close proximity to receiving equipment. The FCC can
require you to stop using the mobile device if such
interference cannot be eliminated. Vehicles using liquefied
petroleum gas (such as propane or butane) must comply with
the National Fire Protection Standard (NFPA-58). For a copy
of this standard, contact the National Fire Protection
Association.
Cautions
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
This phone has been tested and rated for use with hearing
aids for some of the wireless technologies that it uses.
However, there may be some newer wireless technologies
used in this phone that have not been tested yet for use with
hearing aids.
Keep the mobile device and all its parts and accessories out
of the reach of small children.
nl
The HAC rating and measurement procedure are described in
the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) C63.19
standard.
HAC for Newer Technologies
It is important to try the different features of this phone
thoroughly and in different locations, using your hearing aid
or cochlear implant, to determine if you hear any interfering
noise. Consult your service provider or the manufacturer of
this phone for information on hearing aid compatibility. If you
have questions about return or exchange policies, consult
your service provider or phone retailer.
Restricting Children's Access to Your
Mobile Device
229
Fo
Your mobile device is not a toy. Do not allow children to play
with it because they could hurt themselves and others,
damage the mobile device, or make calls that increase your
mobile device bill.
Any changes or modifications to your mobile device not
expressly approved in this document could void your
warranty for this equipment and void your authority to
operate this equipment. Only use approved batteries,
antennas, and chargers. The use of any unauthorized
accessories may be dangerous and void the mobile device
warranty if said accessories cause damage or a defect to the
mobile device.
• Only qualified personnel should service the mobile device or
• Ensure that any mobile devices or related equipment installed in
your vehicle are securely mounted.
• Switch your mobile device off before boarding an aircraft. The use
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
install the mobile device in a vehicle. Faulty installation or service
may be dangerous and may invalidate any warranty applicable to
the device.
inflates with great force. Do not place objects, including installed
or portable wireless equipment near or in the area over the air
bag or in the air bag deployment area. If wireless equipment is
improperly installed and the air bag inflates, serious injury could
result.
Other Important Safety Information
• For vehicles equipped with an air bag, remember that an air bag
nl
Although your mobile device is quite sturdy, it is a complex
piece of equipment and can be broken. Avoid dropping,
hitting, bending, or sitting on it.
• Check regularly that all wireless mobile device equipment in your
vehicle is mounted and operating properly.
• When using a headset in dry environments, static electricity can
build up in the headset and cause a small quick static electrical
shock. To minimize the risk of electrostatic discharge from the
headset avoid using the headset in extremely dry environments or
touch a grounded unpainted metal object to discharge static
electricity before inserting the headset.
• Do not store or carry flammable liquids, gases, or explosive
Fo
materials in the same compartment as the mobile device, its
parts, or accessories.
of wireless mobile devices in aircraft is illegal and may be
dangerous to the aircraft's operation. Check with appropriate
authorities before using any function of a mobile device while on
an aircraft.
• Failure to observe these instructions may lead to the suspension
or denial of cell phone services to the offender, or legal action, or
both.
• While using your device, leave some lights on in the room and do
not hold the screen too close to your eyes.
• Seizures or blackouts can occur when you are exposed to flashing
lights while watching videos or playing games for extended
periods. If you feel any discomfort, stop using the device
immediately.
Health and Safety Information
230
nl
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
perform actions, such as pressing keys, drawing characters on a
touch screen with your fingers, or playing games, you may
experience occasional discomfort in your hands, neck, shoulders,
or other parts of your body. When using your device for extended
periods, hold the device with a relaxed grip, press the keys lightly,
and take frequent breaks. If you continue to have discomfort
during or after such use, stop use and see a physician.
• Reduce risk of repetitive motion injuries. When you repetitively
• If your device has a camera flash or light, do not use the flash or
231
Fo
light close to the eyes of people or pets. [122011]
Section 12: Warranty Information
Phone
1 Year
Batteries
1 Year
Case/Pouch/Holster
90 Days
Other Phone Accessories 1 Year
What is not covered?
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
SAMSUNG TELECOMMUNICATIONS AMERICA, LLC
(“SAMSUNG”) warrants that SAMSUNG’s handsets and
accessories (“Products”) are free from defects in material
and workmanship under normal use and service for the
period commencing upon the date of purchase by the first
consumer purchaser and continuing for the following
specified period of time after that date:
What is covered and for how long?
This Limited Warranty does not cover: (a) defects or damage
resulting from accident, misuse, abnormal use, abnormal
conditions, improper storage, exposure to liquid, moisture,
dampness, sand or dirt, neglect, or unusual physical,
electrical or electromechanical stress; (b) scratches, dents
and cosmetic damage, unless caused by SAMSUNG;
(c) defects or damage resulting from excessive force or use
of a metallic object when pressing on a touch screen;
(d) equipment that has the serial number or the
enhancement data code removed, defaced, damaged,
altered or made illegible; (e) ordinary wear and tear;
(f) defects or damage resulting from the use of Product in
conjunction or connection with accessories, products, or
ancillary/peripheral equipment not furnished or approved by
SAMSUNG; (g) defects or damage resulting from improper
testing, operation, maintenance, installation, service, or
adjustment not furnished or approved by SAMSUNG;
(h) defects or damage resulting from external causes such as
collision with an object, fire, flooding, dirt, windstorm,
lightning, earthquake, exposure to weather conditions, theft,
blown fuse, or improper use of any electrical source;
(i) defects or damage resulting from cellular signal reception
nl
Standard Limited Warranty
Fo
This Limited Warranty is conditioned upon proper use of the
Product.
Warranty Information
232
What are SAMSUNG’s obligations?
During the applicable warranty period, provided the Product
is returned in accordance with the terms of this Limited
Warranty, SAMSUNG will repair or replace the Product, at
SAMSUNG’s sole option, without charge. SAMSUNG may, at
SAMSUNG’s sole option, use rebuilt, reconditioned, or new
parts or components when repairing any Product, or may
replace the Product with a rebuilt, reconditioned or new
Product.
Fo
Repaired/replaced cases, pouches and holsters will be
warranted for a period of ninety (90) days. All other repaired/
replaced Products will be warranted for a period equal to the
233
nl
remainder of the original Limited Warranty on the original
Product or for ninety (90) days, whichever is longer. All
replaced Products, parts, components, boards and
equipment shall become the property of SAMSUNG. Except to
any extent expressly allowed by applicable law, transfer or
assignment of this Limited Warranty is prohibited.
What must you do to obtain warranty service?
To obtain service under this Limited Warranty, you must
return the Product to an authorized phone service facility in
an adequate container for shipping, accompanied by the
sales receipt or comparable proof of sale showing the
original date of purchase, the serial number of the Product
and the seller’s name and address.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
or transmission, or viruses or other software problems
introduced into the Product; or (j) Product used or purchased
outside the United States. This Limited Warranty covers
batteries only if battery capacity falls below 80% of rated
capacity or the battery leaks, and this Limited Warranty does
not cover any battery if (i) the battery has been charged by a
battery charger not specified or approved by SAMSUNG for
charging the battery; (ii) any of the seals on the battery are
broken or show evidence of tampering; or (iii) the battery has
been used in equipment other than the SAMSUNG phone for
which it is specified.
To obtain assistance on where to deliver the Product, please
call SAMSUNG Customer Care at 1-888-987-4357. If
SAMSUNG determines that any Product is not covered by this
Limited Warranty, you must pay all parts, shipping, and labor
charges for the repair or return of such Product.
You should keep a separate backup copy of any contents of
the Product before delivering the Product to SAMSUNG for
warranty service, as some or all of the contents may be
deleted or reformatted during the course of warranty service.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WITHOUT
LIMITATION, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE LIMITED TO
THE DURATION OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY. IN NO EVENT
SHALL SAMSUNG BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES IN EXCESS OF
THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE PRODUCT OR FOR, WITHOUT
LIMITATION, COMMERCIAL LOSS OF ANY SORT; LOSS OF
USE, TIME, DATA, REPUTATION, OPPORTUNITY, GOODWILL,
PROFITS OR SAVINGS; INCONVENIENCE; INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES; OR
DAMAGES ARISING FROM THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE
PRODUCT. SOME STATES AND JURISDICTIONS DO NOT
ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY
LASTS, OR THE DISCLAIMER OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL
OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS
AND DISCLAIMERS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
OR SUITABILITY OF ANY THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR
EQUIPMENT USED IN CONJUNCTION WITH THE PRODUCT, OR
THE ABILITY TO INTEGRATE ANY SUCH SOFTWARE OR
EQUIPMENT WITH THE PRODUCT, WHETHER SUCH
THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT IS INCLUDED WITH
THE PRODUCT DISTRIBUTED BY SAMSUNG OR OTHERWISE.
RESPONSIBILITY FOR THE QUALITY, CAPABILITIES,
OPERATIONS, PERFORMANCE AND SUITABILITY OF ANY
SUCH THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT RESTS
SOLELY WITH THE USER AND THE DIRECT VENDOR, OWNER
OR SUPPLIER OF SUCH THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR
EQUIPMENT.
THIS LIMITED WARRANTY SETS OUT THE FULL EXTENT OF
SAMSUNG’S RESPONSIBILITIES, AND THE EXCLUSIVE
REMEDY REGARDING THE PRODUCTS.
nl
What are the limits on SAMSUNG’s liability?
Fo
SAMSUNG MAKES NO WARRANTIES OR REPRESENTATIONS,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE, AS TO
THE QUALITY, CAPABILITIES, OPERATIONS, PERFORMANCE
Nothing in the Product instructions or information shall be
construed to create an express warranty of any kind with
respect to the Products. No agent, employee, dealer,
representative or reseller is authorized to modify or extend
this Limited Warranty or to make binding representations or
claims, whether in advertising, presentations or otherwise,
on behalf of SAMSUNG regarding the Products or this Limited
Warranty.
This Limited Warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you
may also have other rights that vary from state to state.
Warranty Information
234
235
Fo
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
Any such dispute shall not be combined or consolidated with
a dispute involving any other person’s or entity’s Product or
claim, and specifically, without limitation of the foregoing,
shall not under any circumstances proceed as part of a class
action. The arbitration shall be conducted before a single
arbitrator, whose award may not exceed, in form or amount,
the relief allowed by the applicable law. The arbitration shall
be conducted according to the American Arbitration
Association (AAA) Commercial Arbitration Rules applicable to
consumer disputes. This arbitration provision is entered
pursuant to the Federal Arbitration Act. The laws of the State
of Texas, without reference to its choice of laws principles,
shall govern the interpretation of the Limited Warranty and all
disputes that are subject to this arbitration provision. The
arbitrator shall decide all issues of interpretation and
application of this arbitration provision and the Limited
Warranty.
For any arbitration in which your total damage claims,
exclusive of attorney fees and expert witness fees, are
$5,000.00 or less (“Small Claim”), the arbitrator may, if you
prevail, award your reasonable attorney fees, expert witness
fees and costs as part of any award, but may not grant
SAMSUNG its attorney fees, expert witness fees or costs
unless it is determined that the claim was brought in bad
faith. In a Small Claim case, you shall be required to pay no
more than half of the total administrative, facility and
arbitrator fees, or $50.00 of such fees, whichever is less, and
SAMSUNG shall pay the remainder of such fees.
Administrative, facility and arbitrator fees for arbitrations in
which your total damage claims, exclusive of attorney fees
and expert witness fees, exceed $5,000.00 (“Large Claim”)
shall be determined according to AAA rules. In a Large Claim
case, the arbitrator may grant to the prevailing party, or
apportion among the parties, reasonable attorney fees,
expert witness fees and costs. Judgment may be entered on
the arbitrator’s award in any court of competent jurisdiction.
ALL DISPUTES WITH SAMSUNG ARISING IN ANY WAY FROM
THIS LIMITED WARRANTY OR THE SALE, CONDITION OR
PERFORMANCE OF THE PRODUCTS SHALL BE RESOLVED
EXCLUSIVELY THROUGH FINAL AND BINDING ARBITRATION,
AND NOT BY A COURT OR JURY.
nl
What is the procedure for resolving disputes?
This arbitration provision also applies to claims against
SAMSUNG’s employees, representatives and affiliates if any
such claim arises from the Product’s sale, condition or
performance.
y
Severability
If any portion of this Limited Warranty is held to be illegal or
unenforceable, such partial illegality or unenforceability shall
not affect the enforceability of the remainder of the Limited
Warranty.
nl
Precautions for Transfer and Disposal
If data stored on this device is deleted or reformatted using
the standard methods, the data only appears to be removed
on a superficial level, and it may be possible for someone to
retrieve and reuse the data by means of special software.
Fo
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
You may opt out of this dispute resolution procedure by
providing notice to SAMSUNG no later than 30 calendar days
from the date of the first consumer purchaser’s purchase of the
Product. To opt out, you must send notice by e-mail to
optout@sta.samsung.com, with the subject line: “Arbitration
Opt Out.” You must include in the opt out e-mail (a) your name
and address; (b) the date on which the Product was purchased;
(c) the Product model name or model number; and (d) the IMEI
or MEID or Serial Number, as applicable, if you have it (the IMEI
or MEID or Serial Number can be found (i) on the Product box;
(ii) on the Product information screen, which can be found
under “Settings;” (iii) on a label on the back of the Product
beneath the battery, if the battery is removable; and (iv) on the
outside of the Product if the battery is not removable).
Alternatively, you may opt out by calling 1-888-987-4357 no
later than 30 calendar days from the date of the first consumer
purchaser’s purchase of the Product and providing the same
information. These are the only two forms of notice that will be
effective to opt out of this dispute resolution procedure. Opting
out of this dispute resolution procedure will not affect the
coverage of the Limited Warranty in any way, and you will
continue to enjoy the benefits of the Limited Warranty.
To avoid unintended information leaks and other problems of
this sort, it is recommended that the device be returned to
Samsung’s Customer Care Center for an Extended File
System (EFS) Clear which will eliminate all user memory and
return all settings to default settings. Please contact the
Samsung Customer Care Center for details.
Important! Please provide warranty information (proof of
purchase) to Samsung’s Customer Care Center in
order to provide this service at no charge. If the
warranty has expired on the device, charges may
apply.
Warranty Information
236
©
1. GRANT OF LICENSE. Samsung grants you the following
rights provided that you comply with all terms and conditions
of this EULA: You may install, use, access, display and run
one copy of the Software on the local hard disk(s) or other
permanent storage media of one computer and use the
Software on a single computer or a mobile device at a time,
and you may not make the Software available over a network
where it could be used by multiple computers at the same
time. You may make one copy of the Software in machine
readable form for backup purposes only; provided that the
backup copy must include all copyright or other proprietary
notices contained on the original.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
2012 Samsung Telecommunications America, LLC. All
rights reserved.
Phone: 1-800-SAMSUNG
Phone: 1-888-987-HELP (4357)
This device requires the use of preloaded software in its
normal operation. BY USING THE DEVICE OR ITS PRELOADED
SOFTWARE, YOU ACCEPT THE TERMS OF THIS EULA. IF YOU
DO NOT ACCEPT THESE TERMS, DO NOT USE THE DEVICE OR
THE SOFTWARE.
nl
Samsung Telecommunications America, LLC
1301 E. Lookout Drive
Richardson, Texas 75082
No reproduction in whole or in part allowed without prior
written approval. Specifications and availability subject to
change without notice. [111611]
End User License Agreement for
Software
237
Fo
IMPORTANT. READ CAREFULLY: This End User License
Agreement ("EULA") is a legal agreement between you
(either an individual or a single entity) and Samsung
Electronics Co., Ltd. ("Samsung") for software, owned by
Samsung and its affiliated companies and its third party
suppliers and licensors, that accompanies this EULA, which
includes computer software and may include associated
media, printed materials, "online" or electronic
documentation in connection with your use of this device
("Software").
Certain items of the Software may be subject to open source
licenses. The open source license provisions may override
some of the terms of this EULA. We make the applicable
open source licenses available to you on the Legal Notices
section of the Settings menu of your device.
y
5. SOFTWARE UPDATES. Samsung may provide to you or
make available to you updates, upgrades, supplements and
add-on components (if any) of the Software, including bug
fixes, service upgrades (parts or whole), products or devices,
and updates and enhancements to any software previously
installed (including entirely new versions), (collectively
“Update”) after the date you obtain your initial copy of the
Software to improve the Software and ultimately enhance
your user experience with your device. This EULA applies to
all and any component of the Update that Samsung may
provide to you or make available to you after the date you
obtain your initial copy of the Software, unless we provide
other terms along with such Update. To use Software
provided through Update, you must first be licensed for the
Software identified by Samsung as eligible for the Update.
After the Update, you may no longer use the Software that
formed the basis for your Update eligibility. The updated
Software version may add new functions and, in some
limited cases, may delete existing functions.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
3. LIMITATIONS ON END USER RIGHTS. You may not reverse
engineer, decompile, disassemble, or otherwise attempt to
discover the source code or algorithms of, the Software
(except and only to the extent that such activity is expressly
permitted by applicable law not withstanding this limitation),
or modify, or disable any features of, the Software, or create
derivative works based on the Software. You may not rent,
lease, lend, sublicense or provide commercial hosting
services with the Software.
services or technologies to you and will not disclose this
information in a form that personally identifies you. At all
times your information will be treated in accordance with
Samsung’s Privacy Policy, which can be viewed at:
http://account.samsung.com/membership/pp.
nl
2. RESERVATION OF RIGHTS AND OWNERSHIP. Samsung
reserves all rights not expressly granted to you in this EULA.
The Software is protected by copyright and other intellectual
property laws and treaties. Samsung or its suppliers own the
title, copyright and other intellectual property rights in the
Software. The Software is licensed, not sold.
Fo
4. CONSENT TO USE OF DATA. You agree that Samsung and its
affiliates may collect and use technical information gathered
as part of the product support services related to the
Software provided to you, if any, such as IMEI (your device’s
unique identification number), device number, model name,
customer code, access recording, your device’s current SW
version, MCC (Mobile Country Code), MNC (Mobile Network
Code). Samsung and its affiliates may use this information
solely to improve their products or to provide customized
Warranty Information
238
y
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
With the “Automatic Update” function enabled (as in the
default setting in the System Update menu in the Setting),
your device downloads some Updates automatically from
time to time. Your device will, however, ask for your consent
before installing any Update If you choose to disable the
“Automatic Update” function, then you can check the
availability of new Updates by clicking on the “Check
Update” menu in the Setting. We recommend that you check
availability of any new Updates periodically for optimal use of
your device. If you want to avoid any use of network data for
the Update downloads, then you should choose the “Wi-Fi
Only” option in the Setting. (Regardless of the option you
choose, the “Automatic Update” function downloads Updates
only through Wi-Fi connection.)
network, which may result in additional charges depending
on your payment plan. In addition, your enjoyment of some
features of the Software may be affected by the suitability
and performance of your device hardware or data access.
7. SOFTWARE TRANSFER. You may not transfer this EULA or
the rights to the Software granted herein to any third party
unless it is in connection with the sale of the mobile device
which the Software accompanied. In such event, the transfer
must include all of the Software (including all component
parts, the media and printed materials, any upgrades, this
EULA) and you may not retain any copies of the Software.
The transfer may not be an indirect transfer, such as a
consignment. Prior to the transfer, the end user receiving the
Software must agree to all the EULA terms.
nl
While the Update will be generally available, in some limited
circumstances, the Software updates will only be offered by
your network carrier, and such Software updates will be
governed by your contractual relationship with your network
carrier.
239
Fo
6. Some features of the Software may require your device to
have access to the internet and may be subject to
restrictions imposed by your network or internet provider.
Unless your device is connected to the internet through Wi-Fi
connection, the Software will access through your mobile
8. EXPORT RESTRICTIONS. You acknowledge that the
Software is subject to export restrictions of various countries.
You agree to comply with all applicable international and
national laws that apply to the Software, including all the
applicable export restriction laws and regulations.
9. TERMINATION. This EULA is effective until terminated. Your
rights under this License will terminate automatically without
notice from Samsung if you fail to comply with any of the
Fo
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
10. DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY. UNLESS SEPARATELY STATED
IN A WRITTEN EXPRESS LIMITED WARRANTY
ACCOMPANYING YOUR DEVICE, ALL SOFTWARE PROVIDED
BY SAMSUNG WITH THIS MOBILE DEVICE (WHETHER
INCLUDED WITH THE DEVICE, DOWNLOADED, OR
OTHERWISE OBTAINED) IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND ON AN
"AS AVAILABLE" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND
FROM SAMSUNG, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. TO THE
FULLEST EXTENT POSSIBLE PURSUANT TO APPLICABLE
LAW, SAMSUNG DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS,
IMPLIED, OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY
QUALITY OR WORKMANLIKE EFFORT, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, RELIABILITY OR AVAILABILITY,
ACCURACY, LACK OF VIRUSES, QUIET ENJOYMENT, NON
INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS OR OTHER
VIOLATION OF RIGHTS. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT
ALLOW EXCLUSIONS OR LIMITATIONS OF IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, SO THE ABOVE EXCLUSIONS OR LIMITATIONS
MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. NO ADVICE OR INFORMATION,
WHETHER ORAL OR WRITTEN, OBTAINED BY YOU FROM
SAMSUNG OR ITS AFFILIATES SHALL BE DEEMED TO ALTER
THIS DISCLAIMER BY SAMSUNG OF WARRANTY REGARDING
THE SOFTWARE, OR TO CREATE ANY WARRANTY OF ANY
SORT FROM SAMSUNG.
11. THIRD-PARTY APPLICATIONS. Certain third party
applications may be included with, or downloaded to this
mobile device. Samsung makes no representations
whatsoever about any of these applications. Since Samsung
has no control over such applications, you acknowledge and
agree that Samsung is not responsible for the availability of
such applications and is not responsible or liable for any
content, advertising, products, services, or other materials
on or available from such applications. You expressly
acknowledge and agree that use of third party applications is
at your sole risk and that the entire risk of unsatisfactory
quality, performance, accuracy and effort is with you. It is up
to you to take precautions to ensure that whatever you select
to use is free of such items as viruses, worms, Trojan horses,
and other items of a destructive nature. References on this
mobile device to any names, marks, products, or services of
any third-parties are provided solely as a convenience to you,
and do not constitute or imply an endorsement, sponsorship,
or recommendation of, or affiliation with the third party or its
products and services. You agree that Samsung shall not be
nl
terms and conditions of this EULA. Upon termination of this
EULA, you must cease all use of the Software and destroy all
copies, full or partial, of the Software.
Warranty Information
240
nl
membership registration (“Samsung Account”), and your
rights and obligations will be set forth in separate Samsung
Account terms and conditions and privacy policies. There are
non-Samsung Account applications and services that require
your consent to their separate terms and conditions and
privacy policies. You expressly acknowledge and agree that
your use of such applications and services will be subject to
the applicable terms and conditions and privacy policies.
241
Fo
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
responsible or liable, directly or indirectly, for any damage or
loss, including but not limited to any damage to the mobile
device or loss of data, caused or alleged to be caused by, or
in connection with, use of or reliance on any such third party
content, products, or services available on or through any
such application. You acknowledge and agree that the use of
any third-party application is governed by such third party
application provider's Terms of Use, License Agreement,
Privacy Policy, or other such agreement and that any
information or personal data you provide, whether knowingly
or unknowingly, to such third-party application provider, will
be subject to such third party application provider's privacy
policy, if such a policy exists. SAMSUNG DISCLAIMS ANY
RESPONSIBILITY FOR ANY DISCLOSURE OF INFORMATION OR
ANY OTHER PRACTICES OF ANY THIRD PARTY APPLICATION
PROVIDER. SAMSUNG EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY
WARRANTY REGARDING WHETHER YOUR PERSONAL
INFORMATION IS CAPTURED BY ANY THIRD PARTY
APPLICATION PROVIDER OR THE USE TO WHICH SUCH
PERSONAL INFORMATION MAY BE PUT BY SUCH THIRD
PARTY APPLICATION PROVIDER.
12. SAMSUNG APPLICATIONS. Certain Samsung applications
and services may be included with, or downloaded to, this
mobile device. Many of them require Samsung Services
13. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY. SAMSUNG WILL NOT BE LIABLE
FOR ANY DAMAGES OF ANY KIND ARISING OUT OF OR
RELATING TO THE USE OR THE INABILITY TO USE THE
SOFTWARE OR ANY THIRD PARTY APPLICATION, ITS
CONTENT OR FUNCTIONALITY, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED
TO DAMAGES CAUSED BY OR RELATED TO ERRORS,
OMISSIONS, INTERRUPTIONS, DEFECTS, DELAY IN
OPERATION OR TRANSMISSION, COMPUTER VIRUS, FAILURE
TO CONNECT, NETWORK CHARGES, IN-APP PURCHASES,
AND ALL OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES EVEN IF
SAMSUNG HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGES. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE
EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE EXCLUSIONS OR
LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. NOTWITHSTANDING
nl
15. APPLICABLE LAW. This EULA is governed by the laws of
the jurisdiction where you are a resident or, if a resident of
the United States, by the laws of the state of Texas, without
regard to its conflict of law provisions. This EULA shall not be
governed by the UN Convention on Contracts for the
International Sale of Goods, the application of which is
expressly excluded.
16. DISPUTE RESOLUTION.
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
THE FOREGOING, SAMSUNG ELECTRONIC CO.'S TOTAL
LIABILITY TO YOU FOR ALL LOSSES, DAMAGES, CAUSES OF
ACTION, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THOSE BASED ON
CONTRACT, TORT, OR OTHERWISE, ARISING OUT OF YOUR
USE OF THE SOFTWARE OR THIRD PARTY APPLICATIONS ON
THIS MOBILE DEVICE, OR ANY OTHER PROVISION OF THIS
EULA, SHALL NOT EXCEED THE AMOUNT PURCHASER PAID
SPECIFICALLY FOR THIS MOBILE DEVICE OR ANY SUCH
THIRD PARTY APPLICATION THAT WAS INCLUDED WITH THIS
MOBILE DEVICE. THE FOREGOING LIMITATIONS,
EXCLUSIONS, AND DISCLAIMERS (INCLUDING SECTIONS 10,
11, 12 AND 13) SHALL APPLY TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT
PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, EVEN IF ANY REMEDY
FAILS ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE.
Fo
14. U.S. GOVERNMENT END USERS RESTRICTED RIGHTS. The
Software is licensed only with "restricted rights" and as
"commercial items" consisting of "commercial software"
and "commercial software documentation" with only those
rights as are granted to all other end users pursuant to the
terms and conditions herein. All Products are provided only
with "restricted rights" with only those rights as are granted
to all other end users pursuant to the terms and conditions
herein. All Software and Products are provided subject to
Federal Acquisition Regulation (FAR) 52.227.19.
(a) Non-United States residents. If a dispute, controversy or
difference arising in any way from this EULA or your use of
the Software is not amicably settled, it shall be subject to the
non-exclusive jurisdiction of the courts of the jurisdiction
where you are a resident. Notwithstanding the foregoing,
Samsung may apply for injunctive remedies (or an equivalent
type of urgent legal relief) in any jurisdiction.
(b) United States residents. ALL DISPUTES WITH SAMSUNG
ARISING IN ANY WAY FROM THIS EULA OR YOUR USE OF THE
SOFTWARE SHALL BE RESOLVED EXCLUSIVELY THROUGH
FINAL AND BINDING ARBITRATION, AND NOT BY A COURT OR
JURY. Any such dispute shall not be combined or
consolidated with any other person’s or entity’s claim or
dispute, and specifically, without limitation of the foregoing,
shall not under any circumstances proceed as part of a class
Warranty Information
242
nl
exclusive of attorney fees and expert witness fees, exceed
$5,000.00 ("Large Claim") shall be determined according to
AAA rules. In a Large Claim case, the arbitrator may grant to
the prevailing party, or apportion among the parties,
reasonable attorney fees, expert witness fees and costs.
Judgment may be entered on the arbitrator's award in any
court of competent jurisdiction. This arbitration provision also
applies to claims against Samsung’s employees,
representatives and affiliates if any such claim arises from
the licensing or use of the Software. You may opt out of this
dispute resolution procedure by providing notice to Samsung
no later than 30 calendar days from the date of the first
consumer purchaser’s purchase of this device. To opt out,
you must send notice by e-mail to
optout@sta.samsung.com, with the subject line: "Arbitration
Opt Out." You must include in the opt out e-mail (a) your
name and address; (b) the date on which the device was
purchased; (c) the device model name or model number; and
(d) the IMEI or MEID or Serial Number, as applicable, if you
have it (the IMEI or MEID or Serial Number can be found (i) on
the device box; (ii) on the device information screen, which
can be found under "Settings;" (iii) on a label on the back of
the device beneath the battery, if the battery is removable;
and (iv) on the outside of the device if the battery is not
243
Fo
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
action. The arbitration shall be conducted before a single
arbitrator, whose award may not exceed, in form or amount,
the relief allowed by the applicable law. The arbitration shall
be conducted according to the American Arbitration
Association (AAA) Commercial Arbitration Rules applicable to
consumer disputes. This arbitration provision is entered
pursuant to the Federal Arbitration Act. The laws of the State
of Texas, without reference to its choice of laws principles,
shall govern the interpretation of the EULA and all disputes
that are subject to this arbitration provision. The arbitrator
shall decide all issues of interpretation and application of this
arbitration provision and the EULA. For any arbitration in
which your total damage claims, exclusive of attorney fees
and expert witness fees, are $5,000.00 or less ("Small
Claim"), the arbitrator may, if you prevail, award your
reasonable attorney fees, expert witness fees and costs as
part of any award, but may not grant Samsung its attorney
fees, expert witness fees or costs unless it is determined that
the claim was brought in bad faith. In a Small Claim case,
you shall be required to pay no more than half of the total
administrative, facility and arbitrator fees, or $50.00 of such
fees, whichever is less, and Samsung shall pay the
remainder of such fees. Administrative, facility and arbitrator
fees for arbitrations in which your total damage claims,
y
nl
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
removable). Alternatively, you may opt out by calling
1-888-987-4357 no later than 30 calendar days from the
date of the first consumer purchaser's purchase of the
device and providing the same information. These are the
only two forms of notice that will be effective to opt out of
this dispute resolution procedure. Opting out of this dispute
resolution procedure will not affect your use of the device or
its preloaded Software, and you will continue to enjoy the
benefits of this license.
Fo
17. ENTIRE AGREEMENT; SEVERABILITY. This EULA is the
entire agreement between you and Samsung relating to the
Software and supersedes all prior or contemporaneous oral
or written communications, proposals and representations
with respect to the Software or any other subject matter
covered by this EULA. If any provision of this EULA is held to
be void, invalid, unenforceable or illegal, the other provisions
shall continue in full force and effect. [050113]
Warranty Information
244
Section 13: Samsung Product Registration
Sign Up Now
nl
Customize your Samsung device experience
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
• Activate product warranty
• Access to a personalized My Samsung Mobile account
• No monthly fees
Get More
• Latest info on promotions, events and special ofers on related products
• Review Samsung products and share your opinion
• Great deals on downloads
Register now at
www.samsung.com/register
245
Fo
Scan this code to go
directly to the registration page.
Index
AT&T FamilyMap 178
AT&T Locker 179
AT&T Navigator 179
AT&T Smart Wi-Fi 173
nl
Managing Address Book Contacts
78
Service Dialing Numbers 80
Using Contacts List 71
Address Book Options 75
Adobe PDF 195
Air Gesture
Activate 33
Quick Glance 33
Air gesture 147
Air view 150
Airplane mode 121, 131
Alarm 182
Android Beam 126
Applications
Using the Camcorder 102
Using the Camera 95
World Clock 183
Applications settings
managing 158
running services 158
AT&T DriveMode 178
Back key 31
Backing up your data 152
Battery
charging 9
Display Percentage 11
Installing 7
Low Battery Indicator 11
Battery Use & Safety 217
Bigger Font
Setting 140
Blocking Mode 138
On 138
Bluetooth
Outgoing Headset Condition 135
Sending contacts 176
Books
Play Books 193
Fo
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
Abc mode 63
About Device 160
Accounts 151
Add accounts 151
Adding a New Contact
Idle Screen 69
Address Book 68
Adding a New Contact 69
Adding Pauses to Contact
Numbers 70
Copying a contact to the Phone 79
Copying Contacts to Phone 79
Copying Contacts to SIM Card 79
Deleting Address Book Entries 80
Deleting Contacts from SIM card
79
Dialing a Number 71
Favorites 78
Finding an Address Book Entry 71
Group Settings 77
246
Fo
247
ChatON 117
Children and Cell Phones 212
Clock 182
Commercial Mobile Alerting System
(CMAS) 111, 215
Contacts 68
Cookies
Emptying 167
Creating a Playlist 89
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
Calculator 180
Calendar 180
Calibration 149
Call Functions 50
3-Way Calling (Multi-Party Calling)
59
Address Book 52
Adjusting the Call Volume 57
Answering a Call 53
Call Back Missed Call 54
Call Duration 56
Call forwarding 61
Call Log 54
Call waiting 61
Correcting the Number 51
Dialing a Recent Number 51
Ending a Call 51
International Call 50
Making a Call 50
Manual Pause Dialing 50
Options During a Call 57
Putting a Call on Hold 58
Saving a recent call number to
Address Book 55
Searching for a Number in
Address Book 61
Using the Speakerphone 60
Call rejection 133
Call Sound
Adding More Volume 57
Personalize 58
Camcorder 102
Settings 98
Shooting Video 102
Camcorder Options
Camcorder Options after a Video is
Taken 102
Camera 95
Modes 97
Quick Settings 98
Settings 98
Taking Pictures 95
Care and Maintenance 222
Changing Your Settings 118
Charging battery 9
nl
Bubble
Options 107
Dialing Options 54
Display
icons 20
Using Negative Colors 141
Display / Touch-Screen 220
Do cell phones pose a health hazard?
208
Downloads 185
Draft Messages 104
DriveMode 178
Dual Camera 96
Dual View 96
Editing a Picture 100
nl
Google voice typing settings 142
GPS 221
Group
Adding a contact 77
Editing 78
Removing a contact 77
Group Settings
Editing a Caller Group 78
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
Facebook
Swpe Connect 145
Family Map 178
FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility (HAC)
Regulations for Wireless Devices 227
FCC Notice and Cautions 229
Featured Apps 186
Flipboard 186
Font Size
Changing 140
Gallery 92
viewing pictures 93
viewing videos 93
Gestures 147
Overview 32
Getting Started 6
Setting Up Your Phone 6
Voice mail 15
Gmail 113
Personalize Swype 146
Google Chrome 182
Google Maps 189
Google Play Music 90
Google Voice Typing 65
Fo
Email 111
Creating a Corporate Email
Account 112
Creating Additional Email
Accounts 112
Switching Between Email
Accounts 113
Emergency alert settings 110
Emergency Alerts (CMAS) 111
Emergency Calls 221
Making 51
With SIM 52
Without SIM 51
Entering Text 62
Changing the Text Entry Mode 63
Using 123Sym Mode 64
Using Abc Mode 63
Using Swype 65, 66
Using Symbol/Numeric Mode 64
Exposure to Radio Frequency (RF)
Signals 208
Extra Volume 57
Handwriting feature 65
Health and Safety Information 208
Home key 31
Home screen mode 133
Hotspots 121, 122, 123, 124
Icons
Application 24
Indicator 20
Icons, description 20
In-Call Options 57
Incognito 165
Create Window 165
Exit Window 165
International Call 50
248
Joining Contacts 72
Maps 189
Memory Card 48
249
Fo
Landscape 62
Language and input 142
Language and keyboard settings
select locale 142
Local 188
Location services 153
Location services settings 127
Lock Screen
Say Wake-Up Command 128
Shortcuts 128
Spam 105
Translate Text 105
Types of Messages 103
microSD card 8, 48
Installing 8
Removing 8
microSDHC card 8, 48
Mobile Hotspot 123
Mobile TV 90
Mobile Web 163
Entering Text in the Mobile Web
Browser 164
Navigating with the Mobile Web
163
Using Bookmarks 165
Mono
Audio Setup 141
Motion 148
Activate 33
Overview 32
Motions 147
Movies 92
Multi Window
Activate/Deactivate 37
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
Keyboard Input Methods 142
Keyboard settings 143
Keypad
Changing Text Input 63
Kies via Wi-Fi 123
Memory Card Installation 8
Menu
key 31
Menu Navigation 31
Message
Register a Number as Spam 107
Thread Options 107
Message Options 104
Message Search 108
Messaging
Adding a Signature 110
Block Unknown Senders 110
Creating and Sending Text
Messages 103
Deleting a message 108
Draft 104
Gmail 113
Handwriting 65
Locked 104
Options 104
Scheduled Messages 104
Settings 108
Signing into Email 111
Signing into Gmail 113
nl
Internet 163
y
(PLAN) 111, 215
Phone
Front View 17
icons 20
Rear View 19
Side View 18
Switching On/Off 11
Photo
Editing 100
Picture
Color Correction 101
Face Corrections 101
Frame 101
Pictures 92
Gallery 92
Sharing 93
Places 193
Play Books 193
Play Movies & TV 92
Play Music 90
Play Store 194
Pointer speed 147
POLARIS Office 5 195
POLARIS® Office 5 195
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
nl
Navigation 192
command keys 31
context-sensitive menus 32
terms used 31
touch gestures 31
Navigator 179
Nearby devices 126
Negative Colors 141
NFC
On 93
Noise Reduction 58
Operating Environment 225
Optical Reader 193
Other Important Safety Information
230
Palm Motion
Activate 33
On 33
PC Connections 177
Personal Localized Alerting Network
Fo
Customizing 38
Increase App Window Size 40
Maximize App 40
Panel Relocation 38
Rearrange Apps 38
Removing Apps 38
Restoring Apps 39
Running Multiple Apps 39
Switch Arrangement 40
Tab Repositioning 37
Using 36
Multimedia 81
Music 87
Music Options 88
Music Player 87
adding music 89
creating a playlist 89
playlists 89
removing music 89
settings 88
Mute 57, 60
My Files 190
myAT&T 191
250
R
Fo
Red Eye
Correction 101
Reducing Exposure
Hands-Free Kits and Other
Accessories 211
Reject list 56
remote control WatchON 201
Reset
factory data 152
Responsible Listening 223
Restricting Children's Access to Your
Mobile device 229
251
device administration 155
trusted credentials 156
Service Dialing Numbers 80
Settings 98, 118
Shortcuts 20
SIM card
installation 7
Installing 6
Smart Practices While Driving 215
Smart screen 149
Smart Switch 16
Smart Wi-Fi 173
Snooze 183
Software Update 161
Spam
Add Number 105, 107
Block Unknown Senders 110
Settings 110
Spam Messages
Assigning 105
Speakerphone Key 60
Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) Certification Information 213
Standard Limited Warranty 232
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
QWERTY keypad 62
S Beam 126
On 93
Sharing Multiple Pictures 94
Sharing Pictures 93
S Memo 195
Creating a New Memo 195
S Translator 197
S Voice 198
Set Wake-Up Command 128
SafeSearch
Filtering 206
Samsung Hub
Creating a New Account 81
Using 82
Samsung Link 84
Sharing Media 86
Samsung Link Settings 85
Samsung Mobile Products and Recycling 219
scientific calculator 180
SD Card 48
Security 152, 153
Security settings
nl
Polaris® Office 5 29
Power Saving Mode 139
Powering
Off 11
On 11
Privacy settings
factory data reset 152
Adding Favorites 166
Deleting a Favorite 166
Editing Favorites 166
nl
Video 91
Video player 91
Voice control 150
Voice Mail
Accessing 15
From Another Phone 15
Setup 15
Voice Recorder 200
Volume 131
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
Tethering 123
Text Input
Abc mode 63
Methods 62
numeric mode 64
symbol mode 64
Timer 184
Automatic Answering 135
Touch Screen 12
Lock/Unlock 12
Transferring Large Files 93
Translate 105
TranslateMessage Bubble 108
Translator 197
Travel Charger 9
Using 10
TTY Mode 138
Twitter
Personalize Swype 145
UL Certified Travel Charger 220
Understanding Your Phone 16
Features of Your Phone 16
Front View 17
Rear View 19
Side Views 18
Unmute 57
USB settings
mass storage device 177
USB Tethering 123
Using Favorites
Fo
Stopwatch 184
Swap 58
SWYPE
entering text using 65, 66
Swype
Cellular Data 145
Connect 145
Contribute Data Usage 145
Preferences 144
Updates 146
Swype Keypad Settings 144
Swype Settings 67
Symbol/Numeric mode 64
Synchronization settings
auto-sync 127
Synchronizing Accounts 151
Warranty Information 232
WatchON 201
Adding a New Room 204
Changing Channels 203
Configure Just For You 204
Initial Configuration 202
Locating Programs 203
Personalize 204
Settings 204
Using 203
252
Y
nl
rI
nt DR
er A
na F
lU T
se
Web 163
Widgets
Calculator 25
Camera 25
Email 25
Gmail 26, 186
Settings 29, 199
Voice Recorder 200
Wi-Fi 169
using Kies via Wi-Fi 127
Wi-Fi Direct 119, 172
Wi-Fi Settings 119
World Clock
Deleting an Entry 184
World clock 183
253
Fo
YouTube 205
High Quality 205
SafeSearch Filtering 206
Settings 205
YPmobile (Yellowpages mobile) 207

---

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.6
Linearized                      : No
Encryption                      : Standard V4.4 (128-bit)
User Access                     : Print, Print high-res
Author                          : wcarlisl
Create Date                     : 2013:05:23 14:46:53Z
Modify Date                     : 2013:06:14 17:49:40-04:00
SPDF                            : 1112
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 4.2.1-c043 52.372728, 2009/01/18-15:08:04
Format                          : application/pdf
Creator                         : wcarlisl
Title                           : i527 Mega.book
Creator Tool                    : FrameMaker 9.0
Metadata Date                   : 2013:06:14 17:49:40-04:00
Enhanced                        : By PDF Enhancer 3.1/Win
Spdf                            : 1112
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 10.1.1 (Windows)
Document ID                     : uuid:cba5ae96-6c7e-4514-92b8-ee061da02d69
Instance ID                     : uuid:3346bd41-6b82-40f0-8096-4c3804bde43d
Page Layout                     : SinglePage
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Page Count                      : 260

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools